Dell B2375dnf B2375dfw Mono MFP User’s Guide User Manual To The 6c8323fc 9d62 4e22 9c86 E2a297349b02

User Manual: Dell B2375dnf to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 359 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Dell™ B2375dfw Mono MFP
Dell™ B2375dnf Mono MFP
User’s Guide
- 1 -
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP
User’s Guide
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and
operation of your printer. For information on other documentation included
with your printer, see "Finding Information".
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
1
Double-click the
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP Dell Supplies Ordering
Utility
or
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
icon
on your desktop.
OR
2
Visit Dell's website.
http://www.dell.com/supplies
Contacting Dell
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find
contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell
product catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service
options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may
not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or
customer service issues:
1
Visit
www.dell.com/support
2
Verify your country or region in the
Choose A Country/Region
drop-down menu at the bottom of the page.
3
Click
Contact Us
on the left side of the page.
4
Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5
Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.
- 2 -
Notes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better
use of your printer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of
data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A Caution indicates a potential for property damage, personal
injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision,
Dimension, OptiPlex,
Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell OpenManage and the
YOURS IS HERE logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron
are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, MS-DOS , Windows Vista,
,Windows 7, Windows8 are either trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to
either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc.
disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than
its own.
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
Google, Picasa, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S and other countries.
Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™,and WPA2™ logo are trademarks of
Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective
companies or organizations.
- 3 -
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source
license information.
Rev.1.00
____________________
- 4 -
Finding Information
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here
• Drivers for my printer
•My User’s Guide
Drivers and Documentation CD
You can use the Drivers and Documentation CD to
install, uninstall, or reinstall drivers and utilities or
access your User’s Guide. For details, see
"Software".
Readme files may be included on your Drivers and
Documentation CD to provide last-minute updates
about technical changes to your printer or
advanced technical reference material for
experienced users or technicians.
• How to use my printer
Quick Reference Guide
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety
instructions in your Important Information
prior to setting up and operating your printer.
NOTE: Quick Reference Guide may not be
provided with your product depending on
your country.
•
How to set up my
printer
Setup diagram
Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP
Quick Reference Guide
About Your Printer
Locating the Service Tag
Operator Panel Button Functions
Understanding the Status LED
12 345 12 4356
11 10 9 8 7
1011121314 9 8 7 6
1 Operator Panel
3 Document Width Guide
5 Document Output Tray
7 Control Board Cover
9 Output Tray
11 Tray 1
13 Paper Output Extension
2 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
4 Document Input Tray
6 Document Glass
8 USB Memory Port
10 Front Cover
12 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
14 Toner Cartridge
1 Home Go to home screen.
2 Log In/Out You can log in or log out.
3 Status LED Status LED indicates the status of your machine.
4 Redial/Pause Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode,
or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.
5 Copy Start copy job using copy default setting regardless of which screen
the user is in if it is selected.
6 Power Saver You can enter or exit Power Save mode.
7 Speed Dial1 Fax image to destination from stored speed dial1.
8 Speed Dial2 Fax image to destination from stored speed dial2.
9 Wi-Fi/WPS Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer.
(Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
10 Job Status Job status shows the jobs currently running and in queue.
11 Info Gives detailed information about product feature guide machine’s info.
reports, troubleshooting guide, and quick reference guide.
LED
Status
Wireless
Status
O
Green
Orange
Blue
Blinking
On
Blinking
Blinking
On
O
Description
• The machine is o-time.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received,
or any button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.
The machine is warming up or ready to receive the data.
The machine is on-line and can be used.
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be
cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the
machine resumes operation.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner cartridge.
You can temporarily improve print quality by redistribution.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and
install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.
• The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
• The machine is connected to a wireless network.
• The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
HMCWMA01
JC68-03031A00
Service Tag XXXXXXX
Service Tag
XXXXXXX
000 000 000 00
Express Service Code
Dell 2355dn MFP Quick Reference Guide
lenaP rotarepO
Touch Screen
Front
Back
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Front
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1.
Copy: Enters the copy menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6. : Shows the main screen.
7. : Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
8. : Return to the upper menu.
9. : Scroll through available options.
10. : Start a job.
Front
Front
Operator PanelOperator Panel
Touch ScreenTouch Screen
13
1
7
1
3
4
78
5
2
6
9
10
11
12
14
15
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code
Back
Back
1
2
3
5
4
6
8
9
10
11
12
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1.
Copy: Enters the copy menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6. : Shows the main screen.
7. : Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
8. : Return to the upper menu.
9. : Scroll through available options.
10. : Start a job.
1.
Copy: Enters the copy menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6. : Shows the main screen.
7. : Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
8. : Return to the upper menu.
9. : Scroll through available options.
10. : Start a job.
Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP
1
3 4
2
Setting Up Your Printer
Configuration de votre imprimante | Configurazione della stampante
Einrichten des Druckers | Configuración de la impresora
Verify the contents of the box
Vérifiez le contenu de votre carton
Verificare il contenuto della confezione
Überprüfen Sie den Inhalt der Box
Compruebe el contenido de la caja
Remove the packing material
Retirez les matériaux d’emballage
Rimuovere il materiale di imballo
Entfernen Sie das Verpackungsmaterial
Retire el material de embalaje
(For Ethernet connection only)
Insert Ethernet cable
(Uniquement pour la connexion Ethernet) Insérez le câble Ethernet
(solo per la connessione Ethernet) Inserire il cavo Ethernet
(Nur für Ethernet-Verbindung) Schließen Sie das Ethernet-Kabel an
(Solamente para la conexión Ethernet) Inserte el cable Ethernet
Mettez l’imprimante sous tension
Accendere la stampante
Schalten Sie den Drucker ein
Encienda la impresora
Set the language, country, time zone, date, and time.
Wait until "Ready" appears on the screen.
Réglez la langue, le pays, le fuseau horaire, la date et l’heure. Patientez jusqu’à ce que "Prêt" s’ache à l’écran.
Impostare la lingua, il paese, il fuso orario, la data e l’ora. Attendere finché non viene visualizzato "Pronto" sullo
schermo.
Legen Sie Sprache, Land, Zeitzone, Datum und Uhrzeit fest. Warten Sie, bis "Bereit" im Display angezeigt wird.
Configure el idioma, el país, la zona horaria, la fecha y la hora. Espere hasta que aparezca "Lista" en la pantalla.
Turn on the printer
- 5 -
• Safety information
• Warranty information
•Regulatory Notice
Important Information
Express Service Code and
Service Tag
Express Service Code and Service Tag
Identify your printer when you use
www.dell.com/support or contact technical
support.
Enter the Express Service Code and Service Tag to
direct your call when contacting technical support.
The Express Service Code is not available in all
countries.
• Latest drivers for my
printer
• Answers to technical
service and support
questions
• Documentation for my
printer
Dell Support Website: www.dell.com/support
The Dell Support Website provides several online
tools, including:
• Solutions - Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles
from technicians, and online courses
• Upgrades - Upgrade information for components,
such as memory
• Customer Care - Contact information, order
status, warranty, and repair information
• Downloads - Drivers
• Reference - Printer documentation and product
specifications
You can access Dell Support at
www.dell.com/support
. Select your region on the
WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the
requested details to access help tools and
information.
What Are You Looking For? Find It Here
- 6 -
Contents
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Unpacking Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
About Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operator Panel Button Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Introducing the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Home screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
All Applications screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Editing the Home Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Searching application for an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Understanding the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
User Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Setting the Job Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Internal Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing the PCL Font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing the PS3 Font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting up the hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installing the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Making Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting the Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Powering on the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting fax setup boot sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
- 7 -
Using USB memory device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
About USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Plugging in a USB memory key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Direct USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Scan to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Changing the Scan Feature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Managing the USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting an Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Printing from a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Viewing the USB Memory Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Import (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Export (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setting up Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Storing Individual address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using speed dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Storing Group address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Editing group dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Searching the address book for an entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Exporting Address Book (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Importing Address Book (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Printing Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using Favorite Menu (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Creating Favorite Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Email Setup (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Setting up the Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . 59
Printing the Printer Setting and Op-panel Menu Setting. . . . . . . . . . . 61
Printing the Printer Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Printing the Op-panel Menu setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Access Google Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Scan to Google Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Print from Google Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Scan to SharePoint Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
- 8 -
Scan to SharePoint® Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Creating a My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
My Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Scanning a Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Browse to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
My Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Machine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting the Machine ID (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Changing the Display Language (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Selecting Country (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting Day light Saving (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Power Save Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the Time and Date (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the Clock Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the Sound/Volume (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Timeout Option (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Toner Save Mode (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Timing of Toner Status Alert (Administrator only). . . . . 71
Ignoring Blank Pages (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Ignoring the Toner Low Message (Only for Fax) (Administrator only) . 71
Setting the Language (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Setting the Quick Dial (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting the Media Overwrite (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Changing Admin Password (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting the Security (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting the Altitude Adjustment (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checking the Firmware Version (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting the Application Management (Administrator only) . . . . . . . 77
Factory Reset (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System . . . . 80
- 9 -
Installing Dell Software for Local Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Accessing management tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Firmware Update Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using the Dell Printer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Understanding Dell Printer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Advanced settings user interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Using Dell Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Dell Printer Status overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using Wireless Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Uninstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Embedded Web Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Embedded Web Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
What is Embedded Web Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Required web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Logging into Embedded Web Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Embedded Web Service overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Address Book tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Settings tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Network Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Security tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Maintenance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Print Media Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Card Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
- 10 -
Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selecting an Output Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Printing to the Output Tray (Face down) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Printing to the Rear Door (Face up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Setting the Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting the Paper Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting the Paper Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting the Paper Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setting the Tray linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Substitute Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setting the Default Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setting the paper feeding flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Setting the paper auto feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Substitute Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configure MPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Tray Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Printing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Opening printing preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Basic Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Paper Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Graphic Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Dell Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Using a Favorite Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Change Percentage of Your Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
- 11 -
Printing Posters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Printing Booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Printing on Both Sides of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Using Watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Using an Existing Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Creating a Watermark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Editing a Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Deleting a Watermark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Using Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
What is an Overlay?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Creating a New Page Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Using a Page Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Deleting a Page Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Loading Paper for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selecting the Paper Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Preparing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Loading an Original Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Making Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Using Copy and Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Number of Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Duplex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Original Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Eco Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Changing the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
- 12 -
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Scanning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Scan to Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Setting up an email account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Scanning and sending an email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Scan to PC/Network PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting up an Network Folder/FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Scanning and sending to Network Folder/FTP server . . . . . . . . . . 203
Scan to Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Scan to WSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Installing a WSD Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Scanning using the WSD feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Email & Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Scanning from image editing program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Scanning using the WIA driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Network setup (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Useful network programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
SetIP wired network setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Printing a network configuration report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Printing Across a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Setting IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IPv4 configuration using SetIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
IPv6 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
From the control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Activating IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting IPv6 addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wireless network setup (Dell B2375dfw only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
- 13 -
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Introducing wireless set up methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Using the WPS button (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only) . . . . . . . . . . 220
Items to prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Choosing your type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Using the menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Setup using Windows (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only). . . . . . . . . . . 223
Dell Printer Easy Wi-Fi Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Access point via USB cable in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Ad hoc via USB cable in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Using a network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only) 236
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting up the mobile device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Troubleshooting for wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Other problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Mobile Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Android™ OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Apple® iOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Setting up AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Printing via AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Google Cloud Print™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Registering your Google account to the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Printing with Google Cloud Print™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Setting the Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Setting up the Fax System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Changing the Fax Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Available Fax Defaults Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Testing Fax line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
- 14 -
Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adjusting the Document Darkness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adjusting the Document Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Sending a Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Speed Dial Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Group Dial Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
On Hook Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Confirming Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Redialing fax number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Receiving a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
About Receiving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Receiving Automatically in the Fax Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Receiving Automatically in the Ans/Fax Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Receiving Manually Using an Extension Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Receiving Faxes in the Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Automatic Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Other Ways to Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Sending a fax in the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Sending a Delayed Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fax Forward to Email addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Toll Save Mode (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using the Secure Receiving Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . 262
Using Advanced Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Installing Software for Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Install the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
ReInstallation the printer driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
- 15 -
Printing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Changing Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Printing on Both Sides of the Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Wireless network setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Access point via USB cable in Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Ad hoc via USB cable in Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Installing the MFP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Installing the MFP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Reinstalling the MFP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Install the Linux driver and add network printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Add a network printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using the Unified Driver Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Printers Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
MFP Ports Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Printing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Printing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Configuring Printer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Scanning a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Editing an image with Image Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Unix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Install the Unix driver and add network printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
- 16 -
Uninstalling the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Setting up the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Printing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Changing the machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
General tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Image tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Text tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Margins tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Printer-Specific Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Clearing the printer NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Backing up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Backing up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Cleaning Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cleaning the Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cleaning the Interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cleaning the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Storing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Redistributing Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cleaning the Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Clearing Jams in the DADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Paper Feed Jam (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Paper Feed Jam (optional tray 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
MPF Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
- 17 -
Fuser Area Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Paper Exit Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Duplex Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Clearing LCD Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Paper Feeding Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Printing Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fax Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Copying Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Scanning Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Global address problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Common Windows Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Common Linux Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Common Mac Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Troubleshooting PostScript (PS) Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Installing Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Installing Printer Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Installing an Optional Tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Dell technical support policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
China only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Warranty and return policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
- 18 -
About
Unpacking Your Printer
About Your Printer
Introducing the Screen
Internal Fonts
Setting up the hardware
Installing the Toner Cartridge
Loading Paper
Making Connections
Powering on the Printer
Using USB memory device
Managing the USB Memory
Setting up Address Book
Using Favorite Menu (Administrator only)
Email Setup (Administrator only)
- 19 -
Unpacking Your Printer
1
Select a location for your printer.
CAUTION: The printer requires at least two people to lift it safely.
• Leave enough room to open the printer tray, covers, doors, and options. It is also
important to allow enough space around the printer for proper ventilation.
• Provide the proper environment:
• A firm, level surface.
• Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
• Away from sunlight, extreme humidity, or high fluctuations in temperature.
• A clean, dry, and dust free location.
• Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. See "Setting
up the hardware".
• Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.
NOTE: Leave the printer in the box until you are ready to install it.
2
In addition to the
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
, ensure that
you have the following items in the box. If there is a missing item, contact Dell:
Toner cartridge Power corda
a The appearance of the power cord and the telephone line cord may differ according
to your country’s specifications.
Drivers and Documentation
CDb
Quick Reference GuidecTelephone line cordaSetup diagram
Important Information PaperPort14 CD
Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP
Quick Reference Guide
About Your Printer
Locating the Service Tag
Operator Panel Button Functions
Understanding the Status LED
12 345 12 4356
11 10 9 8 7
1011121314 9 8 7 6
1 Operator Panel
3 Document Width Guide
5 Document Output Tray
7 Control Board Cover
9 Output Tray
11 Tray 1
13 Paper Output Extension
2 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
4 Document Input Tray
6 Document Glass
8 USB Memory Port
10 Front Cover
12 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
14 Toner Cartridge
1 Home Go to home screen.
2 Log In/Out You can log in or log out.
3 Status LED Status LED indicates the status of your machine.
4 Redial/Pause Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode,
or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.
5 Copy Start copy job using copy default setting regardless of which screen
the user is in if it is selected.
6 Power Saver You can enter or exit Power Save mode.
7 Speed Dial1 Fax image to destination from stored speed dial1.
8 Speed Dial2 Fax image to destination from stored speed dial2.
9 Wi-Fi/WPS Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer.
(Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
10 Job Status Job status shows the jobs currently running and in queue.
11 Info Gives detailed information about product feature guide machine’s info.
reports, troubleshooting guide, and quick reference guide.
LED
Status
Wireless
Status
O
Green
Orange
Blue
Blinking
On
Blinking
Blinking
On
O
Description
• The machine is o-time.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received,
or any button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.
The machine is warming up or ready to receive the data.
The machine is on-line and can be used.
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be
cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the
machine resumes operation.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner cartridge.
You can temporarily improve print quality by redistribution.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and
install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.
• The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
• The machine is connected to a wireless network.
• The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
HMCWMA01
JC68-03031A00
Service Tag XXXXXXX
Service Tag
XXXXXXX
000 000 000 00
Express Service Code
Dell 2355dn MFP Quick Reference Guide
lenaP rotarepO
Touch Screen
Front
Back
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Front
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1.
Copy: Enters the copy menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6. : Shows the main screen.
7. : Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
8. : Return to the upper menu.
9. : Scroll through available options.
10. : Start a job.
Front
Front
Operator PanelOperator Panel
Touch ScreenTouch Screen
13
1
7
1
3
4
78
5
2
6
9
10
11
12
14
15
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code
Back
Back
1
2
3
5
4
68
9
10
11
12
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card
1.
Copy: Enters the copy menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6. : Shows the main screen.
7. : Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
8. : Return to the upper menu.
9. : Scroll through available options.
10. : Start a job.
1.
Copy: Enters the copy menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6. : Shows the main screen.
7. : Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
8. : Return to the upper menu.
9. : Scroll through available options.
10. : Start a job.
Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP
1
3 4
2
Setting Up Your Printer
Configuration de votre imprimante | Configurazione della stampante
Einrichten des Druckers | Configuración de la impresora
Verify the contents of the box
Vérifiez le contenu de votre carton
Verificare il contenuto della confezione
Überprüfen Sie den Inhalt der Box
Compruebe el contenido de la caja
Remove the packing material
Retirez les matériaux d’emballage
Rimuovere il materiale di imballo
Entfernen Sie das Verpackungsmaterial
Retire el material de embalaje
(For Ethernet connection only)
Insert Ethernet cable
(Uniquement pour la connexion Ethernet) Insérez le câble Ethernet
(solo per la connessione Ethernet) Inserire il cavo Ethernet
(Nur für Ethernet-Verbindung) Schließen Sie das Ethernet-Kabel an
(Solamente para la conexión Ethernet) Inserte el cable Ethernet
Mettez l’imprimante sous tension
Accendere la stampante
Schalten Sie den Drucker ein
Encienda la impresora
Set the language, country, time zone, date, and time.
Wait until "Ready" appears on the screen.
Réglez la langue, le pays, le fuseau horaire, la date et l’heure. Patientez jusqu’à ce que "Prêt" s’ache à l’écran.
Impostare la lingua, il paese, il fuso orario, la data e l’ora. Attendere finché non viene visualizzato "Pronto" sullo
schermo.
Legen Sie Sprache, Land, Zeitzone, Datum und Uhrzeit fest. Warten Sie, bis "Bereit" im Display angezeigt wird.
Configure el idioma, el país, la zona horaria, la fecha y la hora. Espere hasta que aparezca "Lista" en la pantalla.
Turn on the printer
- 20 -
NOTE: Use the telephone line cord supplied with your printer. If you choose to
use a different cord, use an AWG #26 or lower gauge cord that is not more
than 250 cm (98 inches) in length.
NOTE: The power cord must be plugged into a grounded power socket.
3
Save the carton and packing material in case the printer needs to be repacked.
4
Remove the packing tape from the front, back, and sides of the printer.
b The Drivers and Documentation CD contains Dell printer drivers, Scan drivers, Printer
Settings Utility, Set IP, Mac driver, Linux driver, Dell Toner Management System and a
User’s Guide.
c Quick Reference Guide may not be provided with your product depending on your
country.
- 21 -
About Your Printer
These are the main components of your printer. The following illustrations show the
standard
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
and an optional tray 2
attached:
Front View
- 22 -
Rear View
LINE EXT
EDI
OUTPUT
5V
aIf you want to connect the extension phone or
answering machine, see "Making Connections".
5V output port for IEEE
1284 parallel
connectorab
extension telephone
socket (EXT)a
telephone line
socket (Line)
power switch
Network port
EDI port
USB port
power receptacle
rear door
- 23 -
Operator Panel Button Functions
Press: To:
1Home
()
Go to home screen.
2Log In/Out ( ) You can Log in or log out.
3Job Status ( ) Job status shows the jobs currently running and in queue.
4Info ( ) Gives detailed information about product feature guide
machine’s info., reports, troubleshooting guide, and quick
reference guide.
5 Status LED
Status LED is Indicates the status of your machine.
6Redial/Pause ( ) Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID
in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in
edit mode.
7Copy ( ) Start copy job using copy default setting regardless of
which screen the user is in if it is selected
8Power Saver( ) You can enter or exit Power Save mode
9Speed Dial1( ) Fax image to destination from stored speed dial1.
10 Speed Dial2 ( ) Fax image to destination from stored speed dial2.
11 Wi-Fi/WPS ( )
(
Dell B2375dfw
Mono MFP
only)
Configures the wireless network connection easily
without a computer.
1
3
2
6
5
7 8
11
4
9
10
- 24 -
Understanding the Status LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's condition by the light
color of it's action.
LED Status Description
Status
Off
• The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is
received, or any button is pressed, it switches to
on-line automatically.
Green Blinking The machine is warming up or ready to receive the
data.
On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Orange Blinking
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display
message. When the problem is cleared, the machine
resumes.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner
cartridge. You can temporarily improve print quality
by redistributing the toner.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old
toner cartridge and install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error.
Check the display message.
Wireless Blue
Blinking
• The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
On
• The machine is connected to a wireless network
Off
• The machine is disconnected from a wireless
network.
• The machine is in power save mode.
• The machine's operation mode is ad-hoc mode.
- 25 -
Introducing the Screen
Home screen mode
The home screen on the control panel allows user-friendly operation of the machine. Once
you press the home button( ) on the panel, it shows the home screen.
•
Scan to Email
: You can send a scanned image through your email account. see
"Scan
to Email"
•
Copy
: You can use Copy function. see
"Copying"
•
Fax
: You can use Fax function. see
"Faxing"
•
Scan to Network Folder
: You can save the scanned image onto a network folder. see
"Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server"
•
Scan to SharePoint Online
: You can scan a document to your Microsoft SharePoint
Online account. see
"Scan to SharePoint Online"
•
Access Google Drive
: You can scan to or print from your Google Drive account. see
"Access Google Drive"
•
My Files
: You can access, scan to or print from this internal storage. see
"My Files"
- 26 -
•
My Forms
: You can scan forms or print pre-set form templates from internal or
external storage. see
"My Forms"
•
My Calender
: You can print the calendar from your Google Calendar account. see
"My
Calendar"
•
My Settings
: You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.
•
Scan to USB
: You can save the scanned image onto a USB memory device. see
"Scan
to USB"
•
Scan to WSD
: You can save the scanned image through WSD. see
"Scan to WSD"
•
Scan to PC
: You can save the scanned image onto a PC. see
"Scan to PC/Network PC"
•
Scan to Network PC
: You can save the scanned image onto a network PC. see
"Scan
to PC/Network PC"
•
Scan to FTP
: You can save the scanned image onto a FTP. see
"Setting up an Network
Folder/FTP server"
•
ID Copy
: You can use ID Copy. see
"ID Copying"
•
Multiple-Up Copy
: You can use Multiple-Up Copy. see
"2-Up or 4-Up copying
(N-up)"
•
Book Copy
: You can use Book Copy. see
"Book Copying"
•
Eco Copy
: You can use Eco Copy. see
"Eco Copying"
•
Email & Fax
: You can fax and email the scanned image in one operation. see
"Email &
Fax"
•
Speed Dial Fax
: You can send fax using speed dial. see
"Speed Dial Fax"
•
Group Dial Fax
: You can send fax using group dial. see
"Group Dial Fax"
•
On Hook Fax
: You can send fax using On Hook Fax. see
"On Hook Fax"
• , : Press the left/right arrows to move Previous/next page.
•
All Applicatons
( ) : Shows all applications.
- 27 -
•
Notification Bar
: Press the black bar on top of the display screen. The following
screen appear:
If you want to close the
Notification Bar
, re-press the black bar.
–
Toner
: Shows the amount of remaining toner capacity.
–
Screen Brightness
: Adjusts brightness of the display screen.
–
Notifications
: Shows machine status informations.
- 28 -
All Applications screen mode
Press the
All Applicatons
( ) from the home screen, it shows the applications screen.
•
USB
: You can connect to USB.
•
Scan to Fax Server
: You can save the scanned image via a Fax Server.
•
Scan to Network Folder
: You can save the scanned image onto a network folder.
•
Print from My Files
: You can print from My Files.
•
Troubleshooting
: Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
•
Search
( ) : You can search applications.
•
Category
( ) : Shows the frequently used applications list.
- 29 -
Editing the Home Screen
You can edit the applictions on the home screen using
Edit Mode
and favorite function.
Edit Mode
Touch and hold the home display area (excluding the icon) until
Edit Mode
appears.
NOTE: You need to Log in to use this function.
•
Add Apps
: You can add applications. Press the left/right arrows to select the screen
and click a application to add you want.
•
Remove Apps
: You want to remove the applicaions, select the applications.
•
Move Apps
: You can move applicaions to other screen. Press the left/right arrows to
move the application.
Using Favorite
You can set the application which is frequently used on the home screen.
NOTE: You need to Log in to use this function.
Press
Favorite
( ) button when each applications setting.
For example:
If you want to ID Copy setting to favorite as below :
1
Press
ID Copy
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
ID Copy
from the home screen.
2
Check the
Favorite
( ) button.
3
Select the setting you want to add to the home screen.
•
Change Title Color
: Select the title color.
•
Change Tile Color
: Select the tile color.
•
Set Tilte
: Set the title text.
- 30 -
4
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
5
You can find ID Copy short cut menu on the home Screen.
Searching application for an entry
You can search using
Search
() ,
Category
().
1
Press
All Applicatons
( ) from the home screen.
•Press
Search
( ) from the screen : Enter the application name in the field with
the pop up keyboard.
•Press
Category
( ) from the screen
–
Favorite App
: Shows favorite applications.
–
Copy
: Shows copy related applications.
–
Fax
: Shows fax related applications.
–
Scan
: Shows scan related applications.
–
USB
: Shows USB related applications.
2
Press the home icon ( ) to return to the home Screen.
Understanding the Keyboard
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, diacritical marks, or special symbols using the
keyboard. This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability to
the user.
Touch the input area where you need to enter alphabet characters, numbers, diacritical
marks, or special symbols and the keyboard pops up on the screen.
• : Hide pop up keyboard.
• : Deletes characters in the input area.
• : Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.
• : Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa.
•
: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the numbers or special symbols keyboard.
•: Space bar.
- 31 -
User Profile
Administrator can register 20 users. General user can register himself.
Create ID
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
User Profile
Add
( ) button from the
home screen.
2
Input
ID
,
Password
,
Confirm Password
you want.
3
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
Delete ID
You can delete your ID only. If you want to delete other user, you need to Log in
as an administrator.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
User Profile
Delete
( ) button from the
home screen.
2
Press
Yes
from the screen.
Change Password
You can change your password only. If you want to delete other user, you need to Log in
as an administrator.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
User Profile
Check your ID
Change
password
( ) from the home screen.
2
Input
Password
,
Confirm Password
you want.
3
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
Log In
Depending on the authentication settings you selected, you may need to Log in as an
administrat or User with authority to access some options under Machine Setup menu.
1
Press
My Settings
from the display screen.
2
Select the option you want. If the option is available for the administrator or User with
authority, log in page screen appears.
3
Input
ID
,
Password
and
Domain
using the pop-up keyboard which appears when you
press each field.
• You can also use the
Recent Users
button to find the recently used
ID
and
Domain List
button to find the domain from the list stored in the machine
• When you Log in, you can see the ID of the logged in user on the display.
4
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
- 32 -
Setting the Job Management
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Job Management
from the home screen..
2
Set each option as you want.
•
Stored Print Job
: Print jobs currently stored in the RAM disk.
•
Secure Receive Print
: Print secure received jobs currently stored in the RAM disk.
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Internal Fonts
The
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
Laser printer supports the PCL
and PS fonts. If you want to see the PCL and PS font list, follow these steps:
Printing the PCL Font list
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Reports
PCL Font List
from the home
screen.
2
Press the
Start
() button.
3
PCL Font list pages print out.
Printing the PS3 Font list
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Report
PS Font List
from the home
screen.
2
Press the
Start
() button.
3
PS Font list pages print out.
NOTE: You can add additional PCL fonts and PS fonts in Printer Settings
Utility. See "Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility".
- 33 -
Setting up the hardware
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Placemat.
Make sure you read the Placemat and complete the following steps:
1
Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to
open covers and trays.
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat,
cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2
mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected.
2
Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3
Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.
4
Install the print cartridge.
200 mm
(7.8 inches)
100 mm
(3.9 inches)
200 mm
(7.8 inches)
485 mm (19 inches)
- 34 -
5
Load paper. See "Loading Paper".
6
Make sure that all the cables are connected to the printer.
7
Turn the printer on.
NOTE: When you move the printer, do not tilt or turn it upside down.
Otherwise, the inside of the printer may be contaminated by toner, which can
cause damage to the printer or result in bad printing quality.
Installing the Toner Cartridge
1
Open the front cover.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for
more than a few minutes.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
- 35 -
2
Remove and discard the packing foam.
3
Pull the toner cartridge straight out.
4
Remove the label and the protective film from the toner cartridge.
- 36 -
5
Thoroughly shake the cartridge from side-to-side to distribute the toner evenly inside
the cartridge.
NOTE: If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wipe the toner off with
a dry cloth and wash your clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.
6
Holding the toner cartridge by the handle, slide it into the printer until it locks firmly
into place.
7
Close the front cover.
- 37 -
Loading Paper
Load up to 250 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m
2
, 20lb bond) in the paper tray.
NOTE: Set the paper type and size after loading paper into the paper tray. See
"Setting the Paper Type" and "Setting the Paper Size" for the paper used in copying
and faxing, or "Paper Tab" for computer printing.
Load the paper:
1
Pull the paper tray out of the printer.
2
If you load paper that is longer than a standard (Letter or A4) size, such as Legal paper,
press and unlatch the guide lock, and then slide the paper length guide out completely
to extend the paper tray to its full length.
- 38 -
3
Slide in the paper length guide until it rests against the end of the paper stack.
For paper smaller than Letter size, adjust the rear paper length guide so that it lightly
touches the paper stack.
4
Pinch the paper width guide, and move it towards the stack of paper until it touches
the side of the stack.
- 39 -
5
Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them out. Do not fold or
crease the print media. Align the edges on a level surface.
6
Insert the paper stack into the paper tray with the side to be printed on facing down.
7
Do not exceed the maximum stack height indicated by the paper limit marks on both
the inside walls of the tray.
NOTE: Overloading the paper tray may cause paper jams.
NOTE: Improper adjustment of paper guides can result in paper jams.
- 40 -
8
Slide the paper tray back into the printer.
9
Set the paper type and size. For more information, see "Setting the Paper Type" and
"Setting the Paper Size".
- 41 -
Making Connections
Connecting the Telephone Line
1
Plug one end of a telephone line cord into the RJ11 telephone line socket (FAX) and
the other end into an active wall jack.
To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, remove the plug
from the extension telephone socket (EXT.) ( ) and plug the telephone or answering
machine into the extension telephone socket (EXT.).
2
Alternative setup of Fax connected to a wall socket and a external phone or Telephone
answering device (TAD):
RJ11 telephone line
socket (Line)
To the wall jack
- 42 -
If connecting a FAX using an answering machine or telephone answering device (TAD):
NOTE: Set rings to answer to digit greater than the "Using an Answering
machine" setting for the telephone answering device (TAD).
If connecting a FAX using a computer modem:
NOTE: Set rings to answer to digit greater than the "Using an Answering
machine" setting for the telephone answering device (TAD).
NOTE: For additional information, see "Using an Answering machine" or "Using
a Computer Modem".
LINE EXT
Computer
Telephone Answering Device
LINE EXT
Telephone Answering Device
- 43 -
NOTE: Phone adaptor not supplied for the United Kingdom. You are advised to
buy from local suppliers.
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden,
Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France, and Switzerland), connect the telephone or
answering machine as shown in the following figure.
- 44 -
Connecting the Printer Cable
Connecting the Printer Locally
Local printer refers to a printer connected to your computer using a USB cable. If your
printer is attached to a network instead of your computer, skip this step and go on to
"Connecting the Printer to the Network".
NOTE: USB cables are sold separately. Contact Dell to purchase a USB cable.
NOTE: Connecting the printer to the USB port of the computer requires a certified
USB cable. You will need to buy a USB 2.0-compliant cable that is about 3 m in
length.
1
Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are powered off and
unplugged.
2
Connect a USB cable to the USB port on your printer.
3
Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on the computer, not the
USB keyboard.
- 45 -
Connecting the Printer to the Network
1
Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are powered off and
unplugged.
2
Connect one end of a standard category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) network
cable to a LAN drop or hub, and the other end to the Ethernet network port on the
back of the printer. The printer automatically adjusts for the network speed.
NOTE: After connecting the printer, you need to configure the network parameters
on the operator panel. See "Configuring Network Parameters on the Operator
Panel".
- 46 -
Powering on the Printer
CAUTION: The fusing area at the rear part of the inside of your printer becomes hot
once the printer is powered on.
CAUTION: Be careful not to be burned when you access this area.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the printer when it is powered on. If you do, it may
give you an electric shock.
To power on the printer:
1
Plug one end of the power cord into the power receptacle at the back of the printer
and the other end into a properly grounded outlet.
2
Press the power switch to turn on the printer. The home screen appears on the display
indicating that the printer is now on.
NOTE: If you power on the printer for the first time, you have to set the language,
date, time, country and fax setup sequence. These settings may be needed also
after the firmware upgrade or after the printer is reset.
- 47 -
Setting fax setup boot sequence
1
Set the language. See "Changing the Display Language (Administrator only)".
2
Select the country. See "Selecting Country (Administrator only)".
3
Set the date and time. See "Setting the Time and Date (Administrator only)".
4
When
fax setup confirmation window
appears, select or .
If you selected , your printer restores the fax settings as default.
If you selected
Check
():
a
Enter the machine ID. See "Setting the Printer ID".
b
Select the receive mode and ring to answer. See "Setting up the Fax System".
c
Test the fax line. See "Testing Fax line connection".
5
Your printer returns to Home Screen.
Using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
About USB Memory
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more
room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution
photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move.
You can do the following features using an optional USB memory:
• Scan documents and save them on the USB Memory.
• Print data stored on a USB memory device.
• Restore backup files to the machine’s memory
• Format the USB Memory.
• Check the available memory space.
Plugging in a USB memory key
The USB memory port on the front of your printer is designed for USB V1.1 and USB V2.0
memory.Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size
of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
Use only the metal/shielded
USB memory key.
- 48 -
Insert a USB memory key into the USB memory port on the front of your printer.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or
writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does not cover damage
caused by user’s misuse.
CAUTION: If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings
and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it. For details
about these features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory device.
Direct USB
1
Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
Item Description
Print from USB
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.
Scan to USB
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a
USB memory device.
File Manager
You can delete image files stored in the USB memory.
Folder Size
You can check the amount of memory space available for saving
documents.
Import
You can restore the backup file to the machine.
Export
You can backup
Setup Data
and
Address Book
files
to the USB
memory.
- 49 -
Scan to USB
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Press
All Applicatons
()
Scan to USB
from the home screen.
4
If necessary, customize the scan settings including scan resolution, scan color, scan
format, pdf encryption, duplex, original size and original type by using
Setting
()
from the screen.
5
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
Your printer begins scanning the document and saves it to your USB memory.
6
After scanning is completed, you can remove the USB memory device from the
machine.
- 50 -
Changing the Scan Feature Settings
The following table shows the options you can select.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Default Setting
Scan Default
Scan to
USB
2
Click
Options
to adjust the settings for each scan.
•
Original Type
: Sets the original’s type.
•
Original Size
: Sets the image size.
•
Resolution
: Sets the image resolution.
•
Color
: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option, you cannot select
JPEG in Scan Format and vice versa.
•
Format
: You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
If you select
Mono
in
Scan Format
, do not select
JPEG
. Depending on the
selected scan type, this option may not appear.
•
Duplex
: This feature especially applies when the original documents to be
scanned are two-sided.
•
File Policy
: You can choose the policy for generating file name before you
proceed with the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same
name when you entered a new file name, you can rename ,overwrite or cancel it.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Format Duplex
Text,
Text & Photo,
Photo
DADF : Letter,
A4, A5, JIS
B5,Legal,
Folio, Oficio,
Executive
Platten :
Letter, A4, A5,
JIS B5,
Executive,
Statement
100, 200,
300, 600
Color,
Gray,
Mono
JPEG, BMP,
TIFF, PDF,
Separate
PDF,Multi-Pag
e TIFF, XPS,
Multi-Page XPS
Off, Short
Edge, Long
Edge
- 51 -
Managing the USB Memory
You can delete image files stored in the USB memory.
Deleting an Image File
To delete an image file that you scanned and saved on your USB memory stick.
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
USB
from the home screen.
2
Press
File Manage
.
3
Press the mark next to the file you want to delete.
4
Press
OK
when the confirmation window appears.
5
Press to go to the upper menu.
Printing from a USB memory device
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.
File is supported by Direct Print option.
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible.
NOTE: If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be
different.
•TIFF
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline
•PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version.
- 52 -
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
USB
from the home screen.
2
Press
Print From USB
.
3
Press the up/down arrows to select the folder or file you want.
4
Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number.
5
Press
Start
( )from the screen.
Printing is started.
6
Press
OK
when
Yes
appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2. Otherwise,
press the left/right arrow to select
No
and press
OK
.
7
Press to go to the upper menu.
Viewing the USB Memory Status
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents.
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
USB
from the home screen.
2
Press
Show Space
.
The available memory space appears on the display.
3
Press to go to the upper menu.
Import (Administrator only)
1
Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB
memory port.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
USB
from the home screen.
2
Press
Import
.
3
Select
Setup Data
,
Address Book
and press
OK
.
4
Select the file you want to restore and press
OK
.
5
Press
OK
when
Yes
appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
6
Press to go to the upper menu.
- 53 -
Export (Administrator only)
1
Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
USB
from the home screen.
2
Press
Export
.
3
Select
Setup Data
,
Address Book
and press
OK
.
4
Select the file you want to restore and press
OK
.
5
Press
OK
when
Yes
appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
6
Press to go to the upper menu.
Setting up Address Book
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently via
Embedded
Web Service
and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location
numbers assigned to them in Address Book.
Storing Individual address
1
Press
My Settings
Address Book
Address Book
from the home screen.
2
Press
Add
() icon.
3
Press
New Individual
.
4
Enter the name, email address and phone number in the each field with the pop up
keyboard. And then Press the left/right arrows to select speed dial number.
NOTE: Check
Favorite
( ) icon for addresses you often use. You can easily
find them from the search results.
5
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
NOTE: Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen
Using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax, enter the speed
dial number at which you stored the number you want.
NOTE: For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the corresponding
digit button on the number keypad for more than 2 seconds.
- 54 -
NOTE: For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.
NOTE: You can print the address book list by selecting
Press
My Settings
Address Book
Print
Start
( ) from the home screen.
or
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Reports
Address Book
Start
() from
the home screen.
Storing Group address
1
Press
My Settings
Address Book
Address Book
from the home screen.
2
Press
Add
() icon.
3
Press
New Group
.
4
Enter the group name then press the
Add
( ) icon from the screen.
5
Select the email address you want at list.
6
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
7
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Editing group dial numbers
1
My Settings
Address Book
Address Book
from the home screen.
2
Select group you want.
3
You can edit
Group Name
and add or delete member.
4
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Searching the address book for an entry
you can search using
Search
() ,
Category
().
1
Press
My Settings
Address Book
Address Book
from the home screen.
•Press
Search
( ) from the screen : Enter the email address, phone number or
name in the field with the pop up keyboard.
•Press
Category
( ) from the screen : shows the frequently used addresses.
•Press
Server
( ) from the screen : the shows addresses stored in the
LDAP
server.
2
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 55 -
Exporting Address Book (Administrator only)
You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the machine
by exporting to the machine from your computer.
1
Access the
Embedded Web Service
. See "Embedded Web Service".
2
Click
Address Book
Export
in
task
drop down list.
3
Set the option you want and click the
Export
button.
Then the address book file stored in your computer.
•
BOM
: Exports address list with BOM(Byte Order Mark) information.
•
Encryption
–
No Encryption
: Exports non-encrypted address list.
–
No Encryption without confidential
: Exports non-encypted address list without
confidential.
–
Encryption
: Exports encypted address list.
Importing Address Book (Administrator only)
You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV file format
using
Embedded Web Service
.
•Password-protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited.
•The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF-8.
•Do not change the first row (model name, version, title field).
•Use comma(,) as a separator.
•When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine, the
existing address book data is deleted.
•Make sure to enter valid data. If you enter invalid data, unexpected errors can
occur. Refer to the below rules for entering valid data.
–
Speed dial
: A number is required for each address. You cannot use duplicate
numbers. Only numbers are allowed.
–
User Name
: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 64 byte in UTF-8. <, “,
>, \ in not allowed.
–
Fax
: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 40 byte using numbers (0-9)
and special characters (#,*,-).
–
Email
: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 128 byte in email address
format (ex: printer@domain.com)
1
Access the
Embedded Web Service
. See "Embedded Web Service".
2
Click
Address Book
Import
in
task
area.
3
Select
Browse
, and select the stored file.
- 56 -
4
Setting the option you want and click the
Import
button.
•
Decryption
–
No Decryption
: Imports non-decrypted address list.
–
No Decryption without confidential
: Imports non-decrypted address list without
confidential.
–
Decryption
: Imports decrypted address list.
Printing Address Book
You can check your email address book list by printing it on the paper.
1
Press
My Settings
Address Book
Print
from the home screen.
2
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
The machine begins printing.
Using Favorite Menu (Administrator only)
You can set the option which is frequently used on home screen.
Creating Favorite Menu
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Email Setup
from the home screen.
2
Press the up/down arrows to select the menu item you want.
3
If necessary, press the left/right arrows until the submenu item appears.
4
Enter the required information or select the desired status.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 57 -
Email Setup (Administrator only)
To use email features such as Scan to Email and Fax Forward to email addresses, you first
need to configure the SMTP server settings under network settings. See "Network setup
(Administrator only)" for network parameters.
Setting up the Email
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Email Setup
from the home screen.
2
Press the up/down arrows to select the menu item you want.
3
If necessary, press the left/right arrows until the submenu item appears.
4
Enter the required information or select the desired status.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Available Options for Email Account Setup
Option Description
SMTP Servera
a If you want to use the host name in SMTP server, you must set the DNS server first.
You can set the printer to access an SMTP server for outgoing mail.
•
SMTP Server
: Enables you to enter the IP address or host name of
the SMTP server. This can be given in dotted decimal notation or as a
domain name. (e.g. 111. 121. 211. 211 or smtp.xyz.com)
•
Max Mail Size
: Enables you to specify the maximum size of mail
which can be sent.
Send to Self You can set whether or not your outgoing emails are sent to your
email account.
Default [To:]
Address
You can set the default email address that appears on the
display(Max9).
Default [From:]
Address
You can set the default email address that appears on the
display(Max1).
Default Subject You can set the default subject in your emails.
- 58 -
Menu Overview
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP Menu Functions
Printing the Printer Setting and Op-panel Menu Setting
Access Google Drive
Scan to SharePoint Online
My Files
My Forms
My Calendar
Machine Setup
- 59 -
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP Menu
Functions
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the
machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by touching them on the display
screen.
NOTE: Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or setup.
Refer to the following table:
Copy Scan Fax
Copy
Eco Copy
Book Copy
ID Copy
Multiple-up Copy
Scan to Email
Scan to PC
Scan to Network PC
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to FTP
Scan to USB
Scan to Fax Server
Scan to WSD
Email & Fax
Fax
Speed Dial Fax
Group Dial Fax
On Hook Fax
Access Google Drive
Scan to SharePoint Online
My Files
- 60 -
My Forms
My Calender
My Settings
USB
Print from My files
Troubleshooting
Machine Setup Default Setting
Paper Setup
Tray Behavior
Reports
Fax Setup
Email Setup
Network Setup
Security
User Profile
Initial Setup
Quick Dial Setup
Restore Options
Factory Reset
Job Management
Stamp
Application Management
- 61 -
Printing the Printer Setting and Op-panel
Menu Setting
NOTE: This will be helpful for the users to maneuver through the op-panel setting
and tree in changing the defaults.
Printing the Printer Setting
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Reports
Printer Settings
from the home
screen.
2
Press
Start
( ) on screen.
3
The
Printer Settings
page prints out.
Printing the Op-panel Menu setting
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Reports
Op-panel Menu Tree
from the
home screen.
2
Press
Start
( ) on screen.
3
The
Op-panel Menu Tree
prints out.
Access Google Drive
You should be registered to the Google account to use this function.
Access Google Drive
follow
Google
Log in policy.
1
Press
Access Google Drive
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Access Google Drive
from the home screen.
2
Enter
Email id
and
Password
.
I f you want to log in automatically, check
Remember me
. Then click
Yes
when pop up
shows up. If you want to Log in another google account, press
Logout
from Screen in
Access Google Drive
and re-Log in.
3
Press
Sign in
from the screen.
•
Back
icon ( ) : Quits
Access Google Drive
.
•
Search
( ) : Searchs files.
•
Favorite
( ) button : Setting Favorite. See
"Using Favorite Menu (Administrator
only)"
•
Options
: Setting options.
•
Preview
: See the preview.
- 62 -
•
Logout
: Logs out from the
Access Google Drive
.
CAUTION: If you do not log out, other people can use your ID.
Scan to Google Drive
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass. For details about loading
a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Access Google Drive
Scan to Google Dive
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Access Google Drive
Scan to Google Drive
from the
home screen.
3
Select the folder you want.
If necessary, customize the scan settings including
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
,
Duplex
,
PDF Encryption
,
File Name
,
File Conversion
and
Create Folder
by pressing
Setting
( ) from the screen.
4
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
Print from Google Drive
1
Press
Access Google Drive
Print from Google Drive
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Access Google Drive
Print from Google Drive
from
the home screen.
If necessary, customize the print settings including
Number of Copies
,
Auto Fit
,
Duplex
and
Tray
by pressing
Options
.
2
Select the file you want to print.
3
Press
Start
( ) on screen.
- 63 -
Scan to SharePoint Online
You can use
Scan to SharePoint Online
in the machine. You should be registered to the
Microsoft office 365
account to use this function.
Scan to SharePoint Online
follow
Microsoft
Log in policy.
1
Press
Scan to SharePoint Online
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Scan to SharePoint Online
from the home screen.
2
Enter
URL
,
User ID
and
Password
.
I f you want to log in automatically, check
Remember me
. Then click
Yes
when pop up
shows up. Then you can using without Log in next time. If you want to Log in another
Microsoft office 365
account, press
Logout
from Screen in
Scan to SharePoint
Online
and re-Log in.
3
press
Check
( ) from the screen.
4
You can also add the URL to
Scan to SharePoint Online
List. From the
Embedded Web
Service
select
Settings
tab
Solution Settings
Scan to SharePoint Online
General
.
•
Back
icon ( ) : Quit
Scan to SharePoint Online
.
•
Search
: Searches files.
•
Options
: Setting options.
•
Preview
: See the preview.
•
Logout
: Logs out from the
Scan to SharePoint Online
.
CAUTION: If you do not Log out, other people can use your ID.
Scan to SharePoint® Online
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass. For details about loading
a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Scan to SharePoint® Online
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Scan to SharePoint® Online
from the home screen.
3
Select the folder you want.
If necessary, customize the scan settings including
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
,
Duplex
,
PDF Encryption
,
File Name
,
File Conversion
and
Create Folder
by pressing
Setting
( ) from the screen.
4
Press
Start
( ) on screen.
- 64 -
My Files
This feature allows you to use the device shared folder as a
My Files
. The advantage of this
feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder through your computer’s window.
Creating a My Files
1
Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.
2
Enter the printer’s \\[
ip address
] (
example
:\\169.254.133.42) in the address field, and
press the enter key or click
Go
.
Using My Files
You can use
My Files
in the exactly same way as a normal computer. Create, edit and delete
the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You can also store scanned data in
My Files
.
You can directly print files stored in
My Files
. You can print TIFF, PDF, JPEG,PRN, PDF and
PCL files.
•Press
My Files
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
My Files
from the home screen.
a
Scan to My Files
: Scans and save to
My Files
.
b
Print from My Files
: Prints files in
My Files
.
c
File Manager
: Creates folder, delete folder and files.
d
Folder Size
: Shows hard disk information.
NOTE: All files stored in My Files are not encrypted and can be accessed by all
users.
- 65 -
My Forms
This feature allows you to use scan to
My Files
,
Network Folder
,
FTP
and print from
My
Files
, Network location(
HTTP
,
HTTPS
,
Network Folder
,
FTP
) and also manage
My Files
.
Scanning a Form
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass. For details about loading
a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
My Forms
Scan a Form
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
My Forms
Scan a Form
from the home screen.
3
Select folder you want.
•
My Files
: Scans to
My Files
.
•
Network Folder
: Scans to
Network Folder
.
•
FTP
: Scans to
FTP
.
If necessary, customize the scan settings including
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
,
Duplex
,
PDF Encryption
,
File Name
, and
Overwite
by
pressing
Setting
( ) from the screen.
–
Search
( ) : Searches folder and files.
–
Add Bookmark
( ) : Adds bookmark.
–
Preview
( ) : Preview a document.
4
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
Browse to Print
Browse from My Files
You can print documents stored on
My Files
.
1
Press
My Forms
Browse to Print
Browse from My Files
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
My Forms
Browse to Print
Browse from My
Files
from the home screen.
If necessary, print settings including
Number of Copies
,
Auto Fit
,
Duplex
and
Tray
by
pressing
Setting
( ) from the screen.
–
Search
( ) : Searches folders and files.
–
Add Bookmark
( ) : Adds bookmark.
- 66 -
–
Preview
( ) : Preview a document.
2
Select the file for print.
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
Print from Network Location
You can print on Network location (
HTTP
,
HTTPs
,
Network Folder
,
FTP
).
1
Press
My Forms
Browse to Print
Select from Network Location
from the
home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
My Forms
Browse to Print
Select from
Network Location
from the home screen.
If necessary, print settings including
Number of Copies
,
Auto Fit
,
Duplex
and
Tray
by
pressing
Setting
( ) from the screen.
–
Add Bookmark
() : Add bookmark.
–
Save
( ) : Save Forms.
–
Preview
( ) : Preview a document (JPEG Only).
2
Select
Type
and input
Path
.
–
Type
: Choosing protocol (support navigation function in FTP only).
–
Path
: Input network location path.
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
Managing My Files
You can search, add, delete the files and folders in
My Files
.
1
Press
My Forms
Manage My Files
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
My Forms
Manage My Files
from the home screen.
2
You can add folder, delete file and folder.
–
Add Folder
( ) : Adds folder.
–
Delete
( ) : Deletes files and folders.
- 67 -
My Calendar
You should be registered to the Google Calendar
TM
account to use this function.
My
Calendar
follow
Google
Log in policy.
1
Press
My Calendar
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
My Calendar
from the home screen.
2
Enter
Email
and
Password
, press the
Sign in
from the screen.
I f you want to log in automatically, check
Remember me
. Then click
Yes
when pop up
shows up. Then you can using without Log in next time. If you want to Log in another
google account, press
Log In/Out
( ) from control panel in
My Calendar
and
re-Log in.
3
If necessary, customize the print settings including
Number of Copies
,
Tray
by
pressing
Options
( ) from the screen.
–
Favorite
( ) button : Setting Favorites. See
"Using Favorite Menu (Administrator
only)"
–
Log out
: Logs out from
My Calendar
.
–
Back
icon ( ) : Quit
My Calendar
.
–
Options
: Setting options.
–
Start icon
( ) : Print the calendar for the selected Range.
CAUTION: If you do not Log out, other people can use your ID. If you do not log
out, other people can use your ID.
4
Select calender you want.
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
- 68 -
Machine Setup
Setting the Machine ID (Administrator only)
You can set the machine ID and fax number which will be printed at the top of each page. If
you have installed the fax multi-line kit, you need to select a line first, follow these steps:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Machine ID & Fax Number
from the home screen.
2
Enter
Fax
and
ID
using the keyboard on the display.
See "Understanding the
Keyboard" for more information about using the keyboard.
3
Press
OK
then home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Changing the Display Language (Administrator only)
To change the displayed language that the operator panel displays, follow these steps:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Language
from the home
screen.
2
Press the language you want.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Selecting Country (Administrator only)
To change the country that appears on the operator panel, follow these steps:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Select Country
from the
home screen.
2
Press the country you want.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting Day light Saving (Administrator only)
If your country switches to Daylight Savings Time each year, use this procedure to
automatically switch to Daylight Savings Time and to Standard time.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Day Light Saving
from the
home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Manual
.
3
Enter the
Start Date
,
Start Time
,
End Date
and
End Time
each using the up/down
arrows.
4
If you select
Yes
, system reboot immediately.
- 69 -
Power Save Mode (Administrator only)
If your country switches to Daylight Savings Time each year, use this procedure to
automatically switch to Daylight Savings Time and to Standard time.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Power Save
from the home
screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select the time settings you want.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
NOTE: Available setting range is from 1min. to 120 min. and you can also access this
mode from the EWS (Printer Settings Print Settings Setup Menu and select
Print Power Save).
Setting the Time and Date (Administrator only)
The time and date are printed on all faxes.
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the
printer occurs.
To set the time and date:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Date & Time
from the home
screen.
2
Enter the date and time each using the up/down arrows.
Day= 01 ~ 31
Month= 01 ~ 12
Year= 2000 ~ 2036
Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
Minute= 00 ~ 59
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting the Clock Mode (Administrator only)
To set the clock mode:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Clock Mode
from the home
screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select the appropriate option you want.
Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 70 -
Setting the Sound/Volume (Administrator only)
You can set the volume for key sounds, alarm sounds, and the sound that occurs during a
fax job.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Sound/Volume
from the
home screen.
2
Press the appropriate option you want.
•
Key Sound
: You can set the key sound volume for when pressing the button, you
can select
Mute
, 1(low), 2(mid), and 3(high)
•
Alram Sound
: You can set the alram sound volume, you can select
Mute
, 1(low),
2(mid), and 3(high).
•
Fax Sound
–
Speaker Volume
(only in communication): You can select
Mute
, 1(low) ~7(high).
The sounds from the telephone line through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a
fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which means Comm., the speaker is on
until the remote machine answers.
–
Ring Volume
: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select
Mute
, 1(low)-7(high).
–
Dial Tone Volume
: Adjusts the dial tone volume. For the dial tone volume, you can
select
Mute
, 1(low)-7(high).
3
Press
Check
( ) then home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting the Timeout Option (Administrator only)
You can set the time the printer waits before it restores the default copy or fax settings if you
do not start copying or faxing after changing the settings on the operator panel.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Timeout
from the home
screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select on/off.
3
Enter the timeout value using the up/down arrows or direct input using the popup
keyboard.
4
Press
Check
( ) then home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting the Toner Save Mode (Administrator only)
Toner save mode allows your machine to use less toner on each page. Activating this mode
extends the life of the toner cartridge beyond what one would experience in the normal
mode, but it reduces print quality.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Toner Save
from the home
screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
On
.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 71 -
Setting the Timing of Toner Status Alert (Administrator
only)
You can customize the level to alert toner low or toner almost empty. If the current toner
amount drops below the setting level, the printer will display a warning message on the
operator panel.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Toner Status Alert
from the
home screen.
2
Press the option you want.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select the option in
Warning Level
and
Alert On Panel
.
4
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Ignoring Blank Pages (Administrator only)
The printer detects the printing data from computer whether a page is empty or includes
any data. To skip the blank pages at printing document, follow these steps:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Print Blank Pages
from the
home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
On
.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Ignoring the Toner Low Message (Only for Fax)
(Administrator only)
When the toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life, the printer shows
the toner empty message and continues printing except incoming faxes. In this case,
incoming faxes are saved in memory. However, you can set the machine to print incoming
faxes, even though print quality is not optimal.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Allow Toner Low
from the
home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
On
.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting the Language (Administrator only)
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control panel display.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Language
from the home
screen.
Or
Press
My Settings
Language
from the home screen.
2
Select language you want.
3
Press and home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 72 -
Setting the Quick Dial (Administrator only)
Set the speed dial numbers.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Speed Dial Setting
from the home screen.
Or
Press and hold the
Speed Dial1( ) or Speed Dial2 ( )
button on the control
panel for less than 2 seconds.
2
Select number you want.
3
Choose the appropriate option.
•Add () Quick Dial number1 : Stroed at Quick Dial 1.
• Add ( ) Quick Dial number2 : Stored at Quick Dial 2.
• Delete ( ) Quick Dial number : Delete the Quick Dial number.
4
Press and home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting the Media Overwrite (Administrator only)
You can select the method for overwriting the secure non-volatile memory (hard disk).
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Media Overwrite
from the
home screen.
2
Selects option you want.
•
DoD 5220.28M
: Select to overwrite the memory 3 times. When overwriting three
times, patterns 0x35, 0xCA, 0x97 are used to overwrite the disk’s content. This
method of overwriting the disk is specified by US DoD.
•
Australian ACSI 33
: Select to overwrite the memory 5 times. When overwriting 5
times, character “C” and its complement alternatively are used to overwrite the
disk. After the 2nd time, there is a mandatory validation. For the 5th time, random
data is used.
•
German VSITR
: Select to overwrite the memory 7 times. When overwriting for the
6 times, alternate 0x00 and 0xff are used to overwrite the disk, and, in the 7th
time, the disk is written with 0xAA.
•
Custom
: Select to determine the number of times the memory will be
overwritten. The hard disk will be overwritten as many times as the number you
select.
3
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
If you select Yes, all jobs will be delete and system reboot immediately.
Changing Admin Password (Administrator only)
You can change admin passwod.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Change Admin Password
from the home screen.
2
Enter the new password and confirm password.
Press
Check
( ) then home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 73 -
Setting the Security (Administrator only)
Authentication
This feature allows you to choose the authentication method for user authentication.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Security
Authentication
from the home
screen.
2
Select the
Mode
.
•
Device Mode
: Activate device authentication. Device authentication requests a
user to login before being able to use the device. Users cannot use any
application without logging in.
•
Application Mode
: Activate application authentication. An administrator can
choose the application(s) to require user to login to use. Users cannot use the
selected application(s) without logging-in. Press Application mode to enable
authentication.
•
Basic Mode
: Activate basic authentication. Users are asked to login when they
select options that are only available to administrators.
3
Select the
Method
.
•
Local Authentification
: Executes authentification process based on the user
information stored at HDD in the device.
•
Kerberos Authentification
: Executes authentification process based on the user
information stored at kerberos server.
•
SMB Authentification
: Executes authentification process based on the user
information stored at smb server.
•
LDAP Authentification
: Executes authentification process based on the user
information stored at LDAPserver.
•
Standard Accounting Only
: Allows users to login by entering ID and password.
4
Press and home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Accounting
You can set usage limits for each user to use each feature if Standard accounting method is
chosen.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Security
Accounting
from the home
screen.
2
Select the appropriate accounting option.
•
No Accounting
: Select not to use this feature.
•
Standard Accounting
: Select to use the installed job accounting method.
3
Press and home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 74 -
Setting the Altitude Adjustment (Administrator only)
You can choose the altitude of the place where your machine is located. The print quality is
affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above
sea level. Therefore, it is important to set the right altitude.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Altitude Adjustment
from
the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select altitude your machine is in.
Press and home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
1High 4
2High 3
3High 2
4High 1
5Normal
0
4,000 m
(13,123 ft)
3,000 m
(9,842 ft)
2,000 m
(6,561 ft)
1,000 m
(3,280 ft)
4
3
2
1
5,000 m
(16,404 ft)
5
- 75 -
Checking the Firmware Version (Administrator only)
You can check the firmware version used in the machine.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Firmware Version
from the
home screen.
2
You can check the firmware version used in the machine.
Reports
The following reports are available:
Printer Settings Report
This list shows the status of the user-selectable options. You may print this list to confirm
your changes after changing any settings.
Op-panel Menu Tree Report
This report shows information about the menu functions list.
Address Book Report
This report shows information about the Address Book list.
Out-going Fax Report
This report shows information about the faxes you recently sent.
In-coming Fax Report
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received.
Scheduled Jobs Report
This list shows the documents currently stored for Delayed faxes or Toll Save faxes. The list
shows the starting time and the type of operation.
MSG Confirm Report
This report shows the fax number, the number of pages, the elapsed time of the job, the
communication mode, and the communication results.
Junk Fax List Report
This list shows up to 10 fax numbers specified as junk fax numbers by using the
Junk Fax
Setup
menu; see "Using Advanced Fax Settings". When the Junk Fax Setup feature is turned
on, incoming faxes from those numbers will be blocked.
This feature recognizes the last 6 digits of the fax number set as a remote machine’s ID.
- 76 -
Demo Page Report
Prints a demo page to ensure that the printer is operating correctly.
PCL Font List or PS Font List Report
This report shows the PCL or PS font list.
Network Settings Report
This list shows the status of the network options. You may print this list to confirm your
changes after changing any settings.
Email Sent Report
This report shows information about the emails that you have recently sent.
Printing a Report
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Select
Reports
.
3
Select the reports you want and Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
•
Printer Settings
: Printer Settings list
•
Network Settings
: Network Settings list
•
Address Book
: Individual / Group list
•
Out-going Fax
: Sent fax report
•
In-coming Fax
: Received fax report
•
Scheduled Jobs
: Scheduled job information
•
MSG Confirm
: Message confirmation
•
Junk Fax List
: Junk fax number lists
•
Email Sent
: Sent Email report
•
Op-panel Menu Tree
: Menu Tree list
•
Demo Page
: Demo page
•
PCL Font List
: PCL Font list
•
PS Font List
: PS Font list
The selected information prints out.
- 77 -
Setting the Application Management (Administrator
only)
You can add/delete/enable/disable applications.But, OOB features cannot be added or
deleted.
Adding an application
You can add applications.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Application Management
2
Click the
Install
() icon.
3
Find the application file by entering the URL in
Manual Input(URL)
or by using the
USB
Stick
.
4
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
Deleting an application
You can delete applications.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Application Management
2
Select the application you want.
3
Click the
Uninstall
() icon.
4
Press
Yes
.
Disabling an application
You can enable or disable applications.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Application Management
2
Select the application.
3
Click the
Enabled
button then it will be changed
Disabled
.
4
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Confirming application information
You can check the detail information of applications.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Application Management
2
Select the application.
3
Click the
Detail
() icon.
Factory Reset (Administrator only)
Clears all of the data stored in the memory and resets all of your settings to the factory
default.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Factory Reset
2
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
3
After factory reset, machine will reboot automatically.
- 78 -
Software
Software Overview
Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating
System
Accessing management tools
Firmware Update Utility
Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
Using the Dell Printer Manager
Using Dell Printer Status
Using Wireless Setup Utility
Uninstalling Software
- 79 -
Software Overview
After setting up your printer and connecting it to your computer, you must install the drivers
and utilities from the "Installing Software in Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Operating System" CD
included with your printer. If you purchased a Dell
TM
computer and your printer at the same
time, the drivers and utilities are automatically installed. You don’t need to install them. The
"Installing Software in Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Operating System" CD contains the following:
•
Dell Printer PCL driver
- allows your computer to communicate with your printer. To
use your printer as a printer in Windows, you must install the printer driver(s). For
information about installing the printer drivers in Windows, see "Installing Software in
Microsoft® Windows® Operating System".
•
PS driver
- PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. You can use the PostScript driver to
print documents.
•
Firmware Update Utility
- use this program to update your machine’s firmware. See
"Firmware Update Utility".
•
Embedded Web Service
- enables you to monitor the status of your network printer
without leaving your desk.
•
Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
- allows you to order replacement toner cartridges or
supplies from Dell.
•
Printer Settings Utility
- allows you to set up fax phonebook and the printer's other
options from your computer desktop.
•
SetIP
- Use this program to set your printer's TCP/IP addresses.
•
Dell Printer Manager
- Dell Printer Manager is an application that combines Dell
machine settings into one location.
•
Dell Printer Status
- This program allows you to monitor the printer’s status and alerts
you when an error occurs during printing.
•
Scan Driver
- TWAIN or Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for
scanning documents on your printer.
•
User’s Guide
- PDF documentation provides detailed information about using your
printer.
•
LDAP
- enables you to store Email addresses in the (LDAP) server. Also,
supports a
method of securing LDAP communication via SSL.
In the
Embedded Web Service
,
you can set the LDAP server attributes.
- 80 -
Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows®
Operating System
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the "Minimum Requirements".
NOTE: For Microsoft Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003 Server® 2008, Windows
Vista®, Windows 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows 8 the system
administrator should install Dell software.
Supported Operating Systems
• Windows XP Home edition or Professional
• Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2
•Windows Vista
•
Windows 7
•
Windows 8
Minimum Requirements
• Disk space: Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: 1 GB
Windows 7: 16 GB
Windows 8: 16 GB
Windows Server 2008 R2: 10 GB
• Memory: Windows XP/Server 2003: 128 MB
Windows Vista/Server 2008: 512 MB
Windows 7: 1 GB
Windows 8: 1 GB (2 GB)
Windows Server 2008 R2: 512 MB (2048 MB)
• CPU: Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: Pentium III 933 MHZ or higher
Windows 7: Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher
Windows 8: Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
Windows Server 2008 R2: Pentium IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2
GHz or faster)
• Required software: Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher
- 81 -
Installing Dell Software for Local Printing
A local printer is a printer attached to your computer using a USB cable. If your printer is
attached to a network instead of your computer, skip this step and go on to "Installing Dell
Software for Network Printing" or attached to a network instead of your computer,go on to
A printer driver is a software that lets your computer communicate with your printer. The
procedure to install drivers depends on the operating system you are using.
NOTE: If you attach a USB printer cable while your printer and computer are
powered on, the Found New Hardware Wizard launches immediately. Cancel the
screen and use the "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System"
CD to install the Dell software.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation window
does not appear, click
Start
All Programs
Accessories
Run
.
3
X:\
Setup.exe
replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and
click
OK
.
– For Windows 8, If the installation window does not appear, from
Charms
, select
Search
Apps
and search for
Run
. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click
OK
. If
"Tap to choose what
happens with this disk"
pop-up window appears, click the window and select
Run
Setup.exe
.
4
Select
Setup...
- 82 -
5
Select
USB
on the
Select a Connection Method
.
6
Enter the your printer name. Then click
Next
.
7
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
- 83 -
Accessing management tools
Dell
provides a variety of management tools for Dell printers.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
From the
Start
menu, select
Programs
or
All Programs
.
• For Windows 8, from the
Charms
, select
Search
Apps
.
3
Find
Dell
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
4
You can see installed management tools.
5
Click the management tool you want to use.
Firmware Update Utility
You can update your printer’s firmware using the
Firmware Update Utility
.
1
From the
Start
menu, select
Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
Firmware Update Utility
.
2
Download the latest firmware. Click
www.dell.com/support
3
If your printer is connected with an USB cable, click
USB Connected Printer
.
4
Click
Browse
and select the downloaded firmware file.
5
Click
Update Firmware
.
- 84 -
Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
NOTE: Availabe for Windows or Mac OS users only.
1
Double-click the
Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
icon on your desktop.
OR
From the
Start
menu, select
Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
.
NOTE: For Mac,
Open the
Applications
folder
Dell
folder
Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
.
2
The
Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
window opens.
Shows the toner level
for your printer.
Click to order replacement
toner cartridges online.
See "Ordering Supplies".
Select your location.
Shows phone number.
You can find for more
information on recycling.
- 85 -
Using the Dell Printer Manager
•Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
•For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher requirement for Dell Printer
Manager.
Dell Printer Manager is an application that combines Dell machine settings into one
location. Dell Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments,
settings/actions and launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use
your Dell machine. Dell Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user
to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced user interface. Switching
between the two interfaces is easy:
just click a button.
Understanding Dell Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select
Start
Programs
or
All Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
Dell Printer Manager
.
• For Windows 8, from
Charms
, select
Search
Apps
Dell Printers
Dell
B2375dnf Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
Dell Printer Manager
.
• For Mac, Open the
Applications
folder
Dell
folder
Dell Printer Manager
.
The Dell Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the
table that follows:
NOTE: The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are
using.
- 86 -
1Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer and
network printers added by network discovery (Windows only).
2Printer
information
This area gives you general information about your machine. You
can check information, such as the machine’s model name, IP
address (or Port name), and machine status.
NOTE: You can view the online User’s Guide.
3Application
information
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings, preference,
help, and about.
NOTE: The
button is used to change the user interface
to the advanced settings user interface. See
"Embedded
Web Service".
4Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This section
also includes links to applications in the advanced settings.
NOTE: If you connect your machine to a network, the
Embedded Web Service icon is enabled.
5Contents area Displays information about the selected machine, remaining
toner level, and paper. The information will vary based on the
machine selected. Some machines do not have this feature.
6Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window. You
can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online.
- 87 -
Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible for managing
the network and machines.
NOTE: Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Device Settings
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper, layout,
emulation, network, and print information.
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
•
Scan Activation
: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device.
•
Profile
: Displays the scanning profiles saved on the selected device.
•
Basic tab
: Contains general scan related settings and device settings
•
Image tab
: Contains settings related to image alterations.
Fax to PC Settings
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected device.
•
Disable
: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.
•
Enable Fax Receiving from Device
: Enables faxing on the device and allow more
options to be set.
Alert Settings (Windows only)
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
•
Printer Alert
: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
•
Email Alert
: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
•
Alert History
: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.
- 88 -
Using Dell Printer Status
The Dell Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status.
•The Dell Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
•Available for Windows OS users only
Dell Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Dell Printer Status. Dell
Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software.
You can also launch Dell Printer Status manually. Go to the
Printing Preferences
, click the
Basic
tab
Printer Status
button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Icon Mean Description
Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no errors or
warnings.
Warning The machine is in a state where an error might occur in the
future. For example, it might be in toner low status, which
may lead to toner empty status.
Error The machine has at least one error.
- 89 -
1Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.
The machine and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the
above window may differ depending on the machine in use.
Some machines do not have this feature.
2Option You can set printing job alert related settings.
3 Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online.
4 User’s Guide You can view the online User’s Guide.
5Close Close the window.
- 90 -
Using Wireless Setup Utility
This program is for the wireless configuration.
NOTE: You can only use
SetIP
when your printer is connected to a network.
1
Connect the USB cable to your machine.
2
Print the Network Configuration page of the printer to see the current network
configuration.
3
From the
Start
menu, select
Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
Wireless Setup Utility
.
4
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
- 91 -
Uninstalling Software
You should remove the printer drivers if you are upgrading the software or if your driver
installation fails. You can remove the software using the "Installing Software in Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Operating System" CD or the Windows uninstall option.
NOTE: Close all programs before uninstalling software, and then restart your
computer after uninstalling the software.
1
From the
Start
menu, select
Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
Uninstall
.
2
Select the software you want to remove. Click
Next
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer.
3
After the software is removed, click
Finish
.
- 92 -
Embedded Web Service
Embedded Web Service
What is Embedded Web Service
Required web browser
Logging into Embedded Web Service
Embedded Web Service overview
- 93 -
Embedded Web Service
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network environment
through
Embedded Web Service
. Enables you to monitor the status of your network printer
without leaving your desk.
What is Embedded Web Service
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters
correctly, you can manage the machine via
Embedded Web Service
. Use
Embedded Web
Service
to:
• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
• Change the printer preference.
• Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.
• Get support for using the machine.
• Upgrade machine software.
Required web browser
You need one of the following web browsers to use
Embedded Web Service
.
• Internet Explorer® 8.0 or higher
• Chrome 4.0 or higher
• FireFox 3.0 or higher
• Safari 3.0 or higher
- 94 -
Logging into Embedded Web Service
Before configuring options in
Embedded Web Service
, you need to Log in as an
administrator. You can still use
Embedded Web Service
without Logging in but you won’t
have access to
Settings
tab and
Security
tab.
1
Click
Login
on the upper right of the Embedded Web Service website.
2
Type in the
ID
and
Password
then click
Login
.
•ID: admin
• Password: admin
Embedded Web Service overview
NOTE: Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Information tab
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as
remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an error report.
Active Alerts
You can check the current alerts in the machine. Use this information to troubleshoot
machine errors.
You can view all the alerts in details by clicking the
Expand All
button. Click
on the
Collapse All
button to close the alert list.
•
Severity
: Shows the severity of the alert.
•
Status Code
: Shows the machine alert status code. This code is for service
representatives; this code to the service person when calling for service.
•
Description
: Shows the description of the alert.
•
Skill Level
: Shows the level of skill required to fix the problem.
Supplies
You can check the supplies’ information. For toner cartridges and imaging units, supplies’
status is displayed with a visual graph showing you the amount of each supply left. Page
counts are also available which can help you predict when to change the supplies.
- 95 -
Usage Counters
You can check the billing information and usage counter of the machine.
•
Billing Information
: Shows the billing information such as machine’s serial number.
•
Counters
: Shows the usage counter information by job types.
Current Settings
Shows the current settings of the machine and network.
•
Machine Information
: Shows the current machine settings.
–
System
: Shows the system related machine settings such as general settings and
detailed tray settings.
–
Printer
: Shows printing related settings.
–
Copy
: Shows copy related settings.
–
Fax
: Shows fax related settings.
–
Scan to Email
: Shows scan to email related settings.
–
Scan to Network Folder
: Shows scan to network foler related settings.
–
Scan to FTP
: Shows scan to FTP related settings.
–
Scan to USB
: Shows scan to USB related settings.
–
Scan to Fax Server
: Shows scan to fax server related settings.
–
Scan Security
: Shows scan security related settings.
•
Network Information
: Shows the current network settings. Use this page as a
reference and change the necessary settings needed for using the network.
Security Information
Shows the current security settings of the machine and network.
Print information
You can print all the reports provided by your machine. You can use these reports to help
you maintain your machine.
Address Book tab
You can manage the address book. This feature is also available from the machine.
Individual
You can manage individual entries in the address book.
Adding an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book(Import /
Export). See "Logging into Embedded Web Service"
- 96 -
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Individual
.
2
Click the
Add
button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Enter the
General
information.
4
Enter the
Email
address.
5
Enter the
Phone No.
.
6
Select the server(s) you are using among
Network Folder
,
FTP
and enter the necessary
server information. Click the
Test
button to test the server.
7
Click
Apply
.
Deleting an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Individual
.
2
Check the checkbox(es) of the entry you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete
button above the list.
3
When confirmation message appears, click
OK
.
Editing an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Individual
.
2
Click the
Edit
button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the value as you want.
4
Click
Apply
.
Searching an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Individual
.
2
Enter the key word for your search and from the drop down list select the category to
narrow your search.
3
Click the button.
The search result appears on the list.
Importing an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
- 97 -
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Individual
.
2
Select
Import
from the
Task
drop down list. A pop-up window appears.
3
Select the way to find the location for address book.
•
File
: Click the
Browse
button to find the path for where the address book is
located.
•
Decryption
–
No Decryption
: Import address list without decryption.
–
No Decryption without confidential
: Imports address list without decryption and
confidential.
–
Decryption
: Imports address list with decryption.
4
Click on
OK
.
A pop-up message showing the result appear. If you have failed try again.
Exporting an individual address book entry
You can export the address book as .csv file and save it on the computer.
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Individual
.
2
Select
Export
from the
Task
drop down list. A pop-up window appears.
3
Click on the
Export
button. A pop-up window appears.
4
Select the option you want and click the
Export
button.
5
The address book entry is saved as a
.csv
format. You can save or open the address
book entry.
Group
You can manage group address books.
Adding a group address book
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Groups
.
2
Click the
Add Group
button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Enter the group information.
If you want to add individual address book entries to the group address book, check
Add individual(s) after this group is created. You can add individuals to the group right
away with a pop-up window.
4
Click
Apply
.
- 98 -
Deleting a group
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Groups
.
2
Check the checkbox(es) of the group(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete Group
button above the list.
3
Click
OK
when confirmation window pops up.
Editing a group
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Address Book
tab
Groups
.
2
Check the checkbox(es) of the group(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Edit Group
button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the value as you want.
4
Click
Apply
.
Settings tab
Settings tab has sub menus,
Machine Settings
,
Network Settings
and
Solution Settings
.
You cannot view or access this tab if you do not Log in as an administrator.
See "Logging
into Embedded Web Service"
Machine Settings
You can set machine related settings.
System
•
Setup
: You can set general system related settings.
•
Input Tray
: You can set paper size, type for each tray and other tray related settings.
•
Sound/Volume
: You can set the volume for button sounds, notice alarms, and the
sound that occurs during a fax job.
•
Stamp
: You can adjust the stamp on printouts.
•
Time
: When you set the time and date, it will be used for sending/printing delayed
fax/print jobs or will be printed on reports
Printer
You can set copy related settings such as darkness or adjust the background.
•
General
: You can set the basic settings for printing.
•
Graphic
: You can set the
Print Resolution
for printing.
- 99 -
•
Layout
: You can set paper layout related settings. For more information about the
options, refer to the setting this option from the machine.
•
PCL
: You can set PCL font related settings.
•
PostScript
: You can set PostScript related settings.
•
PDF
: You can set PDF related settings.
•
XPS
: You can set XPS related settings.
•
Font and Macro Download
: You can download fonts and macro to the machine.
Copy
You can set copy related settings such as a darkness.
•
Change Default
: You can set copy related default settings.
Fax
You can set fax related settings such as fax number or redial attempt.
•
General
: You can set general fax related settings.
•
Change Default
: You can set fax related default settings.
•
Received Fax Printing
: You can set received fax printing related settings.
–
Received Fax Printing
: Set the general fax settings.
- Print Duplex : Select to print received fax data on both sides of paper.
- Auto Reduction : Set to automatically reduce an incoming page. When
receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper loaded in
the paper tray, the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of
the paper loaded in the machine.
If you do not enable this option, the machine cannot reduce the original to fit
onto one page. The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or
more pages.
- Discard Size : Enter the reduce size for reduction. The machine minuses the
specified segment set as the discard size. If you have selected Auto Reduction,
this option is enabled.
- Stamp Received Name : You can stamp received name on print outs.
•
Send Forward
: You can set the send fax forward related settings to enable the user to
forward sent faxes to other destinations such as Fax, Email, Network Foler, FTP. Fax
forwarding to several destinations is also possible.
•
Received Forward
: You can set the receive fax forward related settings to enable the
user to forward received faxes to other destinations such as Fax, Email, Network Foler,
FTP. Fax forwarding to several destinations is also possible.
- 100 -
Adding a fax forwarding setting
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Machine Settings
Fax
Send Foward
.
2
Enter the necessary information.
–
General
-
Send Foward
: Enable the send forward function.
- Attachment Format : Select the file format for the fax attachment.
–
Fax Forward To Email
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the sending person’s default address.
- Default Subject : Enter the default subject.
- Default Message : Enter the default message.
3
Forward List
Click on the
Add
button.
–
Fax Forward to
: Select the destination to forward the fax.
–
Address
: Enter the recipient’s address. You can load the address from the address
book by clicking the
Loading Address Book
. If you select FTP and SMB for the
destination, you can manually enter the information by clicking the
Direct Input
.
4
Click
Apply
.
Deleting a fax forwarding setting
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Machine Settings
Fax
Send Foward
.
2
Select the setting you want to delete and click
Delete
.
A pop-up window appears.
3
A confirmation message appears, click
OK
.
The list is reloaded and the setting you deleted is removed from the list.
Editing a fax forwarding setting
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Machine Settings
Fax
Send Foward
.
2
Select the setting you want to edit and click
Edit
.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the value as you want.
4
Click
Apply
.
- 101 -
Adding a fax forwarding setting
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Machine Settings
Fax
Receive Forward
.
2
Enter the necessary information.
–
General
-
Receive Forward
: Enable the receive forward function.
- Attachment Format : Select the file format for the fax attachment.
- Forward & Print : If you want to forwarding with printing, click Enable burton.
–
Fax Forward To Email
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the sending person’s default address.
- Default Subject : Enter the default subject.
- Default Message : Enter the default message.
3
Forward List
Click on the
Add
button.
–
Fax Forward to
: Select the destination to forward the fax.
–
Address
: Enter the recipient’s address. You can load the address from the address
book by clicking the
Loading Address Book
. If you select FTP and SMB for the
destination, you can manually enter the information by clicking the
Direct Input
.
Also you can foward to PC and fax.
4
Click
Apply
.
Deleting a fax forwarding setting
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Machine Settings
Fax
Receive Fax Foward
.
2
Select the setting you want to delete and click
Delete
.
A pop-up window appears.
3
A confirmation message appears, click
OK
.
4
The list is reloaded and the setting you deleted is removed from the list.
Editing a fax forwarding setting
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Machine Settings
Fax
Fax Foward
.
2
Select the setting you want to edit and click
Edit
.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the value as you want.
4
Click
Apply
.
- 102 -
Scan To Email
You can settings for scan to email feature.
NOTE:
If outgoing email server is not configured, click the link under
Outgoing Mail
Server
(
SMTP
and configure the outgoing email server first.
–
General
: Set the general scan to email settings.
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the From
Address field.
- Default [To:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the To Address
field.
- Default Subject : Enter the default subject to appear in the Subject field.
- Default Message : Enter the message to appear in the from Message field.
Check Use default message on Scan To Email if you want to use the default
message when sending emails.
- Advanced : Set the advanced scan to email settings.
- Edit [From] Address : Select whether to allow users to change the From
Address field.
- Replace [From] Address : Select whether to enable users to Replace default
[From] address with Email address of the authenticated user if possible.
- Send to Self : Select whether to enable auto send to self feature, which is
sending a copy of email to oneself.
-Print Confirmation Sheet : Select when to print the print confirmation sheet.
–
Change Default
You can set scan to Email related settings such as
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
and
Original Type
.
Scan To Network Folder
You can settings for scan to network folder feature.
–
General
-
General
: You can set the
Server Connection Timout
.You can set the time that
the system will wait before the server connection fails due to timeout. You can
set the time value between 1-300 second(s). The time value should be 30
seconds or more for reliable operation over congested enterprise networks.
-
Scan to Network Folder
: You can set the Print Confirmation Sheet.Select
when to print the print confirmation sheet.
–
Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
.
- 103 -
Scan To FTP
You can settings for scan to FTP feature.
–
General
-
General
: You can set the
Server Connection Timout
.You can set the time that
the system will wait before the server connection fails due to timeout. You can
set the time value between 1-300 second(s). The time value should be 30
seconds or more for reliable operation over congested enterprise networks.
-
Scan to FTP
: You can set the Print Confirmation Sheet.Select when to print
the print confirmation sheet.
–
Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
and
Original Type
.
Scan To USB
You can settings for scan to USB feature.
–
Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
,
Overwrite
.
Scan To Fax Server
You can settings for scan to Fax Server feature.
–
General
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the From
Address field.
- Default [To:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the To Address
field.
- Customizing Field : Select the customizing field you want. If you select
[From:] Field, you could not use Default [From:] Address.
–
Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
.
Scan Security
You can set Scan related security settings.
–
General
-
PC Scan Security
: When using PC Scan or Scan To PC, Scan Data encryption
to save it.
- 104 -
Email & Fax
You can settings for Scan to Email and Fax.
–
Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as
Email Settings-From:
,
Email Settings-Subject:
,
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
,
Darkness
,
Qualty
.
Email Notification
When an error occurs or the consumables are running out, the machine sends a notification
to the administrator via Email. You can set whether to use this feature or not. You can also
select which alerts to receive and when.
•
General
–
Email Notification
: Check to receive Email notification when there is an alert.
•
Recipients & Conditions
: You can view the list of alerts and add/delete/edit current
alerts.
Adding an alert
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Machine Settings
Email Notification
.
2
Click on the
Add
button under
Recipients & Conditions
.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Enter the recipients’ contact information under
Recipients
.
4
Select the alerts for which you want to receive notification from under
Notifications
.
5
Click
Apply
.
Network Settings tab
You can set up the network environment to use your machine as a network machine.
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Network Settings
.
General
You can set general machine information to use in the network and set ethernet settings.
•
General
: Set the general network settings.
•
Ethernet
: Set the general ethernet settings.
TCP/IPv4
You can set IPv4 settings.
•
General
: Set the general IPv4 settings.
–
IPv4 Protocol
: Check to enable IPv4 protocol.
–
Assign an IP Address
: Select the method for assigning an IP address.
- 105 -
- Manually : Select to enter IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address
manually.
- Automatically : IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
allocated by BOOTP/DHCP Server.
NOTE: If you check Auto IP, when the BOOTP or DHCP fail to allocate IP
address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address after 2 minutes, the machine automatically
allocates a Link-Local IP address, which is the 169.254.0.0/16 set of addresses
defined in RFC 3927.
•
Domain Name
: Set the DNS server settings.
–
Host Name
: Shows the host name. You can change the name in
Settings
tab
Network Settings
General
Printer Name
.
–
Domain Name
: Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128 characters.
–
Primary DNS Server
: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use
primarily.
–
Secondary DNS Server
: Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use as
an alternative.
–
Dynamic DNS Registration
: Check to enable dynamic DNS registration. If this
option is enabled, machine registers its host name and domain name to
configured DNS servers dynamically. Also, if this option is enabled and DHCP is
selected, DHCP FQDN options is automatically disabled.
•
WINS
: Set the WINS server settings.
–
WINS Protocol
: Check to enable WINS server.
–
Primary WINS Server
: Enter the address of the WINS server you want to use
primarily.
–
Secondary WINS Server
: Enter the address of the WINS server you want to use as
an alternative.
TCP/IPv6
You can set IPv6 settings.
•
General
: Set the general IPv6 settings.
–
IPv6 Protocol
: Check to enable IPv6 protocol.
–
Manual Address
: Check to enter Address/Prefix manually.
•
The Assigned IPv6 Addresses
: Shows the assigned IPv6 addresses.
•
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 (DHCPv6)
–
DHCPv6 Configuration
: Select the DHCPv6 Configuration method.
- Use DHCP as directed by a router : DHCPv6 is enabled when a router
advertises to use DHCPv6.
- Always Enable DHCP : Regardless of router advertisement, use DHCPv6 to
acquire an IPv6 address.
- Never use DHCP : Disables DHCPv6.
- 106 -
•
Domain Name System version 6 (DNSv6)
–
Host Name
: Shows the machine's host name.
–
IPv6 Domain Name
: Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128 characters.
–
Primary DNSv6 Server Address
: Enter the address of the DNSv6 server you want
to use primarily.
–
Secondary DNSv6 Server Address
: Enter the address of the DNSv6 server you
want to use as an alternative.
–
Dynamic DNSv6 Registration
: Check to enable or disable dynamic DNSv6
registration.
Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP
You can set TCP/IP, LPR and IPP protocols for network printing.
•
Raw TCP/IP Printing
–
Raw TCP/IP Protocol
: Check to enable Raw TCP/IP.
–
Port Number
: Enter the port number of the machine for raw TCP/IP Printing. You
can change this port number whenever the network environment you are using
changes.
•
LPR/LPD
–
LPR/LPD Protocol
: Check to enable LPR/LPD.
–
Port Number
: Enter the port number of the machine for LPD Printing. You can
change this port number whenever the network environment you are using
changes.
•
Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
–
IPP Protocol
: Check to enable IPP.
–
Printer Name
: Enter the printer name.
–
Network Path
: Shows the printer URI.
AirPrint
You can set
AirPrint
related settings.
•
AirPrint
: If you want to use
AirPrint
, check the Enable.
–
Friendly Name
: Shows the friendly name used by
AirPrint
. The Friendly name will
be shown in Windows network when it detects a machine.
–
Location
: Enter the machine location.
–
Geographical Location
: You can set the geographic location.
•
Latitude
: Enter the latitude.
•
Longitude
: Enter the Longitude.
•
IPP Settings
–
Secure IPP
: Link to
Secure IPP
settings.
–
Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP
: Link to
Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP
settings.
- 107 -
•
Supplies Information
: You can check the Supplies Information.
Google Cloud Print
You can set
Google Cloud Print
related settings.
•
Anonymous Registration
–
Printer Name
: Enter the printer name you want.
–
Printer Description
: Enter the printer description.
–
Proxy Setting
: You can set the proxy server.
•
Enable Proxy
: If you want to use proxy server, check the Enable.
•
Proxy IP
: Enter the proxy IP.
•
Port
: Enter the port.
–
Test Connection
: You test the connection to proxy server.
–
Registration Status
: You can check the registration status.
Telnet
You can set TCP/IP/IPv6, WINS, LPD, and Raw TCP/IP Printing protocols for network
printing.
•
Telnet Protocol
: If you want to use telnet, check the Enable.
–
Port Number
: Enter the port number of 1 to 65535. Default port is 23.
–
Login ID
: Enter the ID when connecting to print with telnet.
–
Password
: Enter the password when connecting to print with telnet.
–
Confirm Password
: Enter the password again.
WSD
If you are using Windows Vista® or later as an operating system, you can set WSD (Web
Service for Device) for searching the device on the network. You can also print from the
searched device.
•
WSD Protocol
: Check to enable WSD protocol.
•
Port Number
: Shows the port number.
SLP
You can set SLP for searching the device on the network.
•
SLP Protocol
: Check to enable SLP protocol.
•
Port Number
: Shows the port number.
•
Scope 1~3
: Enter the network scope to use, up to 3 scopeis can be set. Each machine
must always be in one or more scopes. You need scopes to group services that are
comparable to the network neighborhood in other systems.
•
Message Type
: Select the message type.
•
SLP Multicast TTL
: Enter the TTL value.
- 108 -
•
Registration Lifetime
: Enter the life time of service registration when registering
services with DA.
•
SLP MTU
: Enter the MTU(Maximum Transmission Unit) value.
•
Multicast Address
: Shows the multicast address.
UPNP
Simple Service Discovery Protocol (SSDP) is the basic discovery protocol in UPnP and
provides a mechanism which network clients can use to discover network services. In
applications using SSDP as a discovery protocol, device may be identified by SSDP friendly
name.
•
SSDP Protocol
: Check to enable SSDP protocol.
•
Port Number
: Shows the port number.
•
SSDP TTL
: Enter the packet time to live. Four is set as a default value.
•
Friendly Name
: Shows the friendly name used by SSDP. The Friendly name will be
shown in Windows network when it detects a machine.
mDNS
Multicast DNS (mDNS) used in Bonjour (formerly Rendezvous) from Apple Inc., provides
similar functions to the normal unicast Domain Name System on the LAN without DNS
server.
•
mDNS Protocol
: Check to enable mDNS protocol.
•
Port Number
: Shows the port number used by mDNS.
•
mDNS Name
: Shows the instance name used by the services for registering via mDNS.
•
Friendly Name
: Shows the friendly name used by mDNS. The Friendly name will be
same as the link address used by the mDNS protocol and is shown in the Windows
network when it detects the machine.
CIFS (My Files)
NOTE: All files stored in My Files are not encrypted and can be accessed by all
users.
You can set scan to
My Files
settings.
•
CIF Server
: If you want to use CIF Server, Check to enable.
–
Max Connection
: You can set the available number of connecting user.
–
Anonymous
: If you want to use everyone, check the Allow everyone to connect.
–
Login ID
: Enter the Log in ID.
–
Password
: Enter the password.
–
Confirm Password
: Enter the password again.
– If you want change the password, check the
Change Password
.
•
My Files Status
: you can check the folder total size and available size.
- 109 -
SNMP
You can set
SNMP
related settings.
SNMPv1/v2
You can set
SNMPv1/v2
settings.
•
General
–
SNMPv1/v2 Protocol
: Check to enable SNMPv1/v2 protocol.
•
Community Name
:
–Adding the
SNMP
Community
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Network Settings
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
Community Name
.
b
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
c
Enter the necessary information.
d
Click
Apply
.
– Deleting the
SNMP
Community
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Network Settings
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
Community Name
.
b
Check the checkbox of the name(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete button above the list.
c
A confirmation window appears. Click on
Yes
.
– Editing the
SNMP
Community
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Network Settings
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
Community Name
.
b
Check the checkbox of the name) you want to edit from the list and click the Edit
button above the list.
c
Change the necessary information.
d
Click
Apply
.
•
SNMP Traps
:
–Adding the
SNMP
traps
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Network Settings
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
SNMP Traps
.
b
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
c
Enter the necessary information.
d
Click
Apply
.
- 110 -
– Deleting the
SNMP
traps
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Network Settings
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
SNMP Traps
.
b
Check the checkbox of the name(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete button above the list.
c
A confirmation window appears. Click on
Yes
.
– Editing the
SNMP
traps
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
Network Settings
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
SNMP Traps
.
b
Check the checkbox of the name) you want to edit from the list and click the
Edit
button above the list.
c
Change the necessary information.
d
Click
Apply
.
SNMPv3
You can set SNMPv3 settings.
•
General
–
SNMPv3 Protocol
: Check to enable SNMPv3 protocol.
•
Authentication
–
User Name
: Check to enable SNMPv3 protocol.
–
Authentication Password
: Enter the password you want to use for
read-and-write authentication.
–
Confirm Password
: Re-enter the password for confirmation.
–
Authentication Algorithm
: Select authentication method.
•
Privacy
–
Privacy Password
: Enter the password used to encrypt SNMPv3
request/response.
–
Confirm Password
: Re-enter the Privacy Password for confirmation.
–
Privacy Algorithm
: Shows the algorithm used to encrypt the SNMPv3
request/response. Only DES algorithm is supported, you can not change it
manually.
SNMP/iPrint
•
SNMP/iPrint
–
SNMP/iPrint
: Select your operate system.
- 111 -
Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP)
You can set server settings for outgoing emails. If this setting is not configured, you cannot
use scan to email feature. Outgoing emails will be sent through SMTP server you set here.
•
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
–
SMTP Server
: Enter the SMTP server address.
–
Port Number
: Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535. 25 is set as a default
value.
•
SMTP Login Information
–
SMTP Requires Authentication
: Check if you went to set authentication when
sending outgoing emails.
–
Login ID
: Enter the Log in ID used for authentication. You can enter up to 64
characters.
–
Password
: Enter the password for authentication. You can enter up to 64
characters.
–
Confirm Password
: Re-enter the Privacy Password for confirmation.
•
POP3 Authentication
–
SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication
: You can set POP3
authentication to appear before SMTP client authentication usage. If you enable
this option, POP3 is required by the SMTP server first. Check to enable this option.
–
POP3 Server
: Enter the POP3 server address.
–
Port Number
: Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535. 110 is set as a
default value.
–
Login ID
: Enter the Log in ID used for POP3. You can enter up to 64 characters.
–
Password
: Enter the password for authentication. You can enter up to 64
characters.
–
Confirm Password
: Re-enter the Privacy Password for confirmation.
•
Advanced
–
Secure Email Connection with SSL/TLS
: Check to enable this option if your
SMTP server supports SSL/TLS. When you are sending an Email from the machine,
your Email will be encrypted. TLS/SSL will make a secure channel between the
machine and the SMTP server.
–
SMTP Server Connection Timeout
: You can set the time that system will wait
before the SMTP server connection fails due to timeout. You can set the time
value between 30~120 second(s). The time value should be 30 seconds or more
for reliable operation over congested enterprise networks. Thirty seconds are set
as a default.
–
Default [From:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the From
Address field.
–
Maximum Message Size
: You can set the maximum message size. If the scanned
document is larger than this message size, it will be split into multiple messages.
•
SMTP Configuration Test
- 112 -
–
Test
: Click to test if the server works properly.
HTTP
You can allow or block users from accessing the
Embedded Web Service
.
•
HTTP Protocol
: Check to allow user to access SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
Port Number
: Shows the server port number.
Proxy
You can set proxy settings and enable authentication to connect to licence server through
http proxy server. These proxy settings are provided currently only if the administrator wants
to update an XOA application’s license online through proxy server.
•
Proxy Settings
–
Use Proxy
: Check to enable proxy settings.
–
HTTP Proxy Server Address
: Enter the HTTP proxy server address to use.
–
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number
: Enter the HTTP proxy server port number to
use.
•
Proxy Authentication Settings
–
Enable
: Check to enable proxy server authentication.
–
User ID
: Enter the user ID for proxy server authentication.
–
Password
: Enter the password for proxy server authentication.
Wireless (
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
only)
You can set Wireless and WiFi settings.
Wireless
•
General
–
Wireless
: Check to enable wireless.
•
Wireless Settings
–
Easy Wireless Settings
: You can use
Easy Wireless Settings
.
a
Press
Wizard
.
b
Select
Network Name(SSID)
you want.
c
Click
Next
.
d
Shows wireless setup confirmation, click
Apply
.
•
Advanced Settings
: You can set advanced settings. click
Custom
.
•
Power Save
: Select on/off.
•
SSID
: Select
Search List
dropdown list or enter the
Insert New SSID
.
•
Operation Mode
: You can choose the operation mode.
•
Ad-hoc Channel
: If you select the
Ad-hoc
operation mode, choose the
Ad-hoc channel.
- 113 -
•
Connection Status
–
Link Status
: You can check the link status.
Wi-Fi Direct
TM
•
Wi-Fi Direct
TM
–
Wi-Fi Direct
TM
: Select Wi-Fi On / Off.
–
Device Name
: Enter the device name.
–
IP Address
: Enter the IP address.
–
Group Owner
: You can active group owner.
–
Network Key
: Enter your network key.
• If you want to hide netwok key, check
Hide Network Key
.
•
Wi-Fi Direct
TM
Status
– Shows Wi-Fi status (
Current Role
,
Current SSID
,
Current Status
).
Solution Settings
You can set solution related settings. Before using this function, you need to enable in
Application Mnagement. See
"Application Management"
Access Google Drive
•
General
–
Send Confirmation Report
: You can set your printer to scan confirmation report
automatically.
–
File Prefix Name
: You can set the prefix name.
–
Allow user to enter filename
: You can set to allow users to enter the filename
On/Off.
•
Change Default
–
Scan to Google Drive
: You can set
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original
Size
,
Original Type
,
Overwrite
and
Create Folder
.
–
Print From Google Drive
: You can set
Number of Copies
,
Auto Fit
,
Duplex
and
Collation
.
•
Auto Login User Lists
You can check and delete the auto Login lists.
My Calender
•
Change Default
–
Print Range
: You can set the print range.
–
Number of Copies
: You can set
Number of Copies
.
–
Tray
: You can set
Tray
.
•
Auto Login User Lists
- 114 -
– You can check and delete the auto Login lists.
Scan to SharePoint Online
•
General
–
Send Confirmation Report
: You can set your printer to print and scan
confirmation report automatically.
–
File Prefix Name
: You can set the file prefix name.
–
Allow user to enter filename
: You can set to allow users to enter the filename
On/Off.
–
Scan to SharePoint Online List
: You can
Add
,
Delete
,
Edit
the list. Enter the
URL
you want on
Add
list.
•
Change Default
–
Scan to SharePoint Online
: You can set
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
,
Overwrite
and
Create Folder
.
•
Auto Login User Lists
– You can check and delete the auto Login lists.
My Forms
•
Change Default
–
Scan to My Forms
: You can set
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original
Size
,
Original Type
and
Overwrite
.
–
Print My Forms
: You can set
Number of Copies
,
Auto Fit
,
Duplex
.
•
Bookmark
: You can add, delete or edit bookmark.
Adding an
Bookmark
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
My Forms
Bookmark
.
2
Click the
Add
button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Select the add type, if you select
Add Folder
, enter the
Folder Name
.
If you select
Add Bookmark
, go on to the next step.
4
Select add bookmark
Type
.
•
My Files
–
Bookmark Name
: Enter the bookmark name you want.
–
My Files Path
: Enter the file location path.
•
Network Folder
–
Bookmark Name
: Enter the bookmark name you want.
- 115 -
–
URL
: Enter the URL path.
–
Server Port
: Enter the server port.
–
Domain
: Enter the domain name.
•
FTP
–
Bookmark Name
: Enter the bookmark name you want.
–
URL
: Enter the URL path.
–
Server Port
: Enter the server port.
5
Click
Apply
.
Deleting an Bookmark entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
My Forms
Bookmark
.
2
Check the checkbox(es) of the entry you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete
button above the list.
3
When confirmation message appears, click
OK
.
Editing an Bookmark entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
My Forms
Bookmark
.
2
Click the
Edit
button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the value as you want.
4
Click
Apply
.
Searching an Bookmark entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Settings
tab
My Forms
Bookmark
.
2
Enter the key word for your search and from the drop down list select the category to
narrow your search.
3
Click the
Search
() button.
The search result appears on the list.
- 116 -
My Files
NOTE: All files stored in My Files are not encrypted and can be accessed by all
users.
•
Change Default
–
Scan to My Files
: You can set
Resolution
,
Color
,
Format
,
Duplex
,
Original Size
,
Original Type
and
Overwrite
.
–
Print from My Files
: You can set
Number of Copies
,
Auto Fit
and
Duplex
.
Security tab
The security tab has System Security, Network Security, User Access Control and System
Log. You cannot access this tab if you do not Log in as an administrator.
System Security
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Security
.
System Administrator
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Security
System
Administrator
.
Enter the system administrator’s information.
Feature Management
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Security
Feature
Management
.
You can enable/disable network features. Check the features you want to enable and click
Apply
.
NOTE: If you want to connect through Secure HTTP (HTTPS), check both HTTP
and HTTPS.
Information Hiding
You can enable/disable information hiding features. Select the features you want to enable
and click
Apply
.
•
Hiding restriction option
–
Show All Information
: If you check this button, show all information.
–
Show user’s own information only
: If you check this burton, show user’s own
information only.
Restart Device
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Security
Restart
Devive
.
You can reboot your machine. Click the
Restart Now
button to reboot.
- 117 -
NOTE: If you reboot the machine, all the current jobs will be deleted. Close jobs
before rebooting.
Network Security
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
.
Digital Certificate
You can manage digital certificates. A digital certificate is an electronic certificate that
verifies the secure association between communication nodes. You need to add the
certificate for SSL communication.
•You can view all the certificates in detail by clicking the Expand All button and
close them by clicking the Collapse All button.
•To have safe communication between the
Embedded Web Service
and the
machine, add a certificate beforehand and check Secure HTTP to use the
machine in a safe and secure environment.
Adding a certificate
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
DigitalCertificate
.
2
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Choose one of the following installation methods and add a certificate.
•
Create a Self-Signed Device Certificate
a
From the
Install/Create Device Certificate or CSR
, select
Create a Self-Signed
Device Certificate
and click
Next
.
b
Refer to the section on creating a new certificate and enter the necessary values.
c
Click
Next
and check the information, then click Close.
d
Check the created certificate from the list.
•
Install CA Signed Device Certificate
a
From the
Install/Create Device Certificate or CSR
, select
Install CA Signed
Device Certificate
and click
Next
.
b
Enter the certificate’s
Friendly Name
,
Private Password
, and
Confirm Password
.
c
Select the CA signed certificate using the
Browse
button.
d
Click
Next
and check the information.
e
Check the created certificate in the list.
- 118 -
•
Create Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
a
From the
Install/Create Device Certificate or CSR
, select
Create Certificate
Signing Request (CSR)
and click
Next
.
b
Refer to the section on creating a new certificate and enter the necessary values.
c
Copy the Certificate Signing Request information and acquire the certificate from
the certification server.
–
How to acquire the certificate from the certification server:
1. Open a web browser in the certification server and connect to
http://certification server’s IP address/certsrv/.
2. Select request a certificate.
3. Select advanced certificate request.
4. Select submit a certificate request by using a base-64-encoded CMC or
PKC ….
5. Paste the copied Certificate Signing Request information saved request and
select submit.
6. Acquire the certificate from the download certificate.
d
Find and upload the acquired certificate to by using the
Browse
button and the
Upload Certificate button
.
•
Deleting a certificate
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
DigitalCertificate
.
b
Check the checkbox of the certificate(s) you want to delete from the list and click
the
Delete
button above the list.
c
The list is reloaded and the certificate you deleted is removed from the list.
•
Editing a certificate
a
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
DigitalCertificate
.
b
Check the checkbox of the certificate you want to edit from the list and click the
Edit
button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
c
Edit the necessary information.
d
Click
Apply
.
Secure Connection
You can set scure connection.
NOTE:
To set a secure connection, Digital Certificate is required.
- 119 -
SNMPv3
See
"SNMPv3".
IP Security
You can set to enable or disable
IPSec
connection. Also you can check
IPSec
status.
IP/MAC Filtering
You can set filtering options for IP and MAC addresses. If the administrator does not add a
filtering rule for IPv4, IPv6, and MAC addresses, nothing is filtered. If the administrator has
added a filtering rule, filtering will be applied to the entered IPv4, IPv6, and MAC addresses.
IPv4 Filtering
You can enable/disable IPv4 filtering as well as manage filtering rules.
IPv6 Filtering
You can enable/disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage filtering rules.
MAC Filtering
You can enable/disable Mac filtering as well as manage filtering rules.
802.1x
You can enable/disable 802.1x Security.See
"802.1x"
External Authentication Server
Set the servers for authentication.
Kerberos Sever
You can set Kerberos server settings.
Adding a Kerberos server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server
.
2
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Enter the necessary information.
•
Required Information
–
Realm
: Enter the default realm.
–
Server Address
: Enter the default server address.
–
Port Number
: Enter the default port number. 88 is set as a default value.
–
Make to Default Server
: Check to set the server as the default server.
•
Additional Information
- 120 -
–
Backup Server
: Enter the back up server address.
–
Port Number
: Enter the backup port number. 88 is set as a default value.
4
Click
Apply
.
Deleting a Kerberos server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server
.
2
From the Kerberos server list, check the server(s) you want to delete.
3
Click the
Delete
button.
4
A confirmation message appears, click
Yes
.
Editing a Kerberos server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server
.
2
From the Kerberos server list, check the server(s) you want to edit.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the necessary information.
4
Click
Apply
.
Testing a Kerberos server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server
.
2
From the Kerberos server list, check the server you want to test.
NOTE: The server to be tested should be selected from the list of servers that were
added by using the adding a server feature.
3
Click the
Test
button.
SMB Server
You can set SMB server settings.
Adding a SMB server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
SMB Server
.
2
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Enter the necessary information.
•
Required Information
–
Domain
: Enter the domain name to be used for Log in. You can enter up to 128
characters. You can only use ASCII 32 - 35, 37 - 63, 65 - 123, or 125 character sets.
–
Server Address
: Enter the default server.
- 121 -
–
Port Number
: Enter the default port number from 1 to 65535. 445is set as a
default value.
• Standard port number for SMB over NetBIOS is 139.
• Standard port number SMB over TCPIP direct is 445.
–
Make to Default Server
: Select to make it a default server.
•
Additional Information
–
Backup Server
: Enter the backup server.
–
Port Number
: Enter the backup port number from 1 to 65535. 445is set as a
default value.
4
Click
Apply
.
Deleting a SMB server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
SMB Server
.
2
From the SMB server list, check the server(s) you want to delete.
3
Click the
Delete
button.
4
A confirmation message appears, click
Yes
.
Editing a SMB server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
SMB Server
.
2
From the SMB server list, check the server(s) you want to edit and click
Edit
.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the necessary information.
4
Click
Apply
.
Testing a SMB server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
SMB Server
.
2
From the SMB server list, check the server you want to test.
NOTE: The server to be tested should be selected from the list of servers that were
added by using the adding a server feature.
3
Click the
Test
button.
LDAP Server
You can set LDAP server settings.
Adding a LDAP server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server
.
- 122 -
2
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Enter the necessary information.
•
LDAP Server
–
LDAP Server
: Enter the server address.
–
Port Number
: Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535. 389 is set as a
default value.
–
Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
: Select the attribute.
•
LDAP User Search
–
Search Root Directory
: Enter search root directory which is the top search level
of the LDAP directory tree. You can enter up to 64 characters.
–
Authentication methods
: Select the authentication method for accessing the
LDAP Server during the address book search.
- Anonymous : Select to allow users without Logging in.
- Simple : Select to set the password for Logging in. If you select Simple, enter
the following information.
•
Login Name
: You can enter up to 64 characters.
•
Password
: You can enter up to 64 characters.
•
Confirm Password
: Re-enter the password for confirmation.
•
Append Root to Base DN
: Select whether to enable or disable append root
to base DN.
–
Max No. of Searches
: You can set the maximum number of results that need to
be returned during LDAP address book search.
–
Search Timeout
: You can set the maximum search timeout for LDAP address
book search.
–
LDAP Referral
: Select whether to turn on or off the
LDAP
Referral. If this option is
ON
, LDAP client will search referral server if the LDAP server has no data to reply
to query and if the LDAP server has a referral server.
–
Search By
: Select the category you want to use for searching.
–
LDAPs
: Check to enable LDAPs.
4
Click
Apply
.
Deleting a LDAP server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server
.
2
From the LDAP server list, check the server(s) you want to delete.
3
Click the
Delete
button.
4
A confirmation message appears, click
Yes
.
- 123 -
Editing a LDAP server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server
.
2
From the LDAP server list, check the server(s) you want to edit and click
Edit
.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Change the necessary information.
4
Click
Apply
.
Testing a LDAP server
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
Network Security
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server
.
2
From the LDAP server list, check the server you want to test.
3
Click the
Test
button.
802.1x
You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based authentication. If this
authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed to access through the protected side
of the network until the machine is authorized. Use this feature to protect your network.
802.1x Security
•
802.1x Security
: Check to enable this feature.
•
Authentication Algorithm
: Select the authentication algorithm to use.
–
EAP-MD5
: Offers minimal security. The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to
dictionary attacks, and does not support key generation.
–
PEAPv0/EAP-MS-CHAPv2
: Recommended for users who only intend to use
Microsoft desktop clients and servers. For other users, it is not recommended.
–
EAP-MS-CHAPv2
: MS-CHAPv2 provides two-way authentication between peers
by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response packet and an
authenticator Response message on the Success packet.
–
TLS
: This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet between a
client and server.
•
Credentials
: Enter the
User Name
,
Password
, and
Confirm Password
to use for the
authentication.
•
Server Validation
: select/unselect the certificate to use for validation. This option
appears when you select
PEAPv0/EAP-MS-CHAPv2
or
TLS
.
User Access Control
You can restrict users from accessing the machine or application. You can also give specific
permission for user to only use certain feature of the machine. For example, you can allow
user A to only use print feature. In this case, user A will not be able to scan, copy or fax with
the machine.
- 124 -
Authentication (Activating access control)
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
User Access Control
Authentication
.
You can choose the authentication method for user authentication. Select a mode and click
on the
Options
button.
•
Mode
–
Basic Authentication
: Activate basic authentication. Users are asked to Log in
when they select options that are only available to administrators. Those options
are marked with “a” or “(administrator only)” in this guide.
–
Device Authentication
: Activate device authentication. Device authentication
requests user to Log in before using the device. Users cannot use any application
without Log in. Press the
Edit Application
button and select the feature to
enable/disable authentication.
–
Application Authentication
: Activate application authentication. An administrator
can choose the application(s) to require user to Log in to use. Users cannot use
the selected application(s) without Logging in. Press the
Edit Application
button
and select the application(s) to enable/disable authentication.
•
Application State
–
Edit Application
: Select the feature/application you want to enable/disable
authentication. This option is available only for Device Authentication and
Application Authentication.
•
AA Method
: Select the authentication method from the list.
•
Options
button
–
Log in Identification
: Select the options for Logging in.
–
Password Expiration Period
: Select whether to set an expiration period for the
password.
–
Password Policy
: Select the password policy. If you enable the
Apply strong
password
, the password should be at least 8 characters long and it should be a
combination of letters, numbers, and special characters (except for <,>,”,\).If you
select
Remote Authentication
,
•
Log in Restriction
: Select what to do when users keep fail to Log in. Select
Enable
to
enable this feature.
•
Log out Policy
: Select when to log users out.
–
Force to log out
: Select to automatically log users out when a job is completed.
–
No log out
: Select to allow users to Log out manually.
–
Log out reminder
: Select to show users a Log out request message when a job is
completed.
•
Log out Time
: Select the time for automatic Log out. When there are no jobs in
process or no input for the selected time, the system Logs out automatically Logs out.
- 125 -
User profile
You can store user information on the machine’s hard drive. You can use this feature to
manage the users using the machine. You can also group the users and manage them as a
group. You can add up to 20 entries. User identified by user ID and password are allowed to
modify their password. They are allowed to view all of their profile information. When it
comes to the role, users are allowed to see only the role they belong to but not its
permissions.
Adding a user profile
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
User Access Control
User Profile
.
2
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Enter the necessary information.
NOTE: If you group a user in a group with ADMIN rights, the user will be able to
use the same ADMIN rights.
4
Click
Apply
.
Deleting a user profile
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
User Access Control
User Profile
Individual
.
2
Check the checkbox of the role you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete
button above the list.
NOTE: There should be at least one person or a group with ADMIN rights, and
it cannot be deleted.
3
Click
OK
when confirmation window pops up.
The list is reloaded and the profile you deleted is removed from the list.
Editing a user profile
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
User Access Control
User Profile
Individual
.
2
Check the checkbox of the role you want to edit from the list and click the
Edit
button
above the list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Edit the necessary information.
4
Click
Apply
.
- 126 -
System Log
You can keep logs of events that have happened in the machine. The administrator can
record and manage the machine usage information by keeping the system log files. The
system log files are stored on the machine’s HDD (hard disk drive), and when it is full, it will
erase old data. Export and save the important audit data separately using the exporting
feature.
Log configuration
You can enable or disable keeping logs. You can also backup log files by periods and
transfer to a repository server.
•
Log Configuration
–
Job Log
: Check to keep job logs.
–
Operation Log
: Check to keep operation logs like system boot up.
–
Security Event Log
: Check to keep security event logs (user authentication,
view/delete log data).
•
Log Backup
–
Log Backup
: Check to backup the log files.
–
Schedule
: Check the period to backup.
–
Time
: Check the time period to backup.
–
Protocol
: Select the server to store the backup files.
–
Server Address
: Enter the server address.
–
Server Port
: Enter the port number.
–
Login Name
: Enter the Log in name to use for Logging into the server. If you want
to allow anyone to access the server, check Anonymous.
–
Password
: Enter the password.
–
Confirm Password
: Re-enter the password for confirmation.
–
Domain
: Enter the domain name. Depending on the protocol you select, this field
may not be available.
–
Path
: Enter the path for saving the log backup file.
–
Manual backup
: Backup immediately with the current settings. If you backup
manually, the settings will not be saved.
- 127 -
Log Viewer
You can view, delete, and search log files.
Viewing the log file
You can view, delete, and search log files.
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Log
Log
Viewer
.
2
Click the log file or click the
Expand All
button.
3
Click the
Collapse All
button to close the log file.
Deleting the log file
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Log
Log
Viewer
.
2
Check the checkbox(es) of the log file(s) you want to delete and click the
Delete
button.
3
A confirmation message appears, click
OK
.
Searching the log file
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Log
Log
Viewer
.
2
Enter the keyword in the field, and select the category from the drop-down list next to
it. The list is reloaded.
Exporting the log file
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Security
tab
System Log
Log
Viewer
.
2
Check the checkbox(es) of the log file(s) to export and select
Export
from the
Task
drop-down list.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Select the destination of the file you want and click
Export
.
NOTE: The file will be saved as in .csv format
4
Save the file.
5
Click
Close
.
- 128 -
Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware, managing
applications, and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
the Dell website or download manuals and drivers by selecting the
Link
menu.
Firmware Upgrade
You can check the firmware version used in the machine. Check the version and update it if
necessary.
Checking the firmware version.
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Maintenance
tab
Firmware Upgrade
.
2
Check the firmware version.
Application Management
You can manage the applications.
Application
You can add/delete/enable/disable applications. But, OOB features cannot be added or
deleted.
Adding an application
You can add applications.
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Maintenance
tab
Application
Management
Application
.
2
Click the
Add
button.
A pop-up window appears.
3
Find the application file by entering the URL or by using the
Browse
button.
4
Click
OK
.
Deleting an application
You can delete applications.
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Maintenance
tab
Application
Management
Application
.
2
From the list, select the application(s) you want to delete and click
Delete
.
3
A confirmation message appear, click
OK
.
The list is reloaded and the application you deleted is removed from the list.
4
Click
OK
.
- 129 -
Enabling/Disabling an application
You can enable or disable applications.
1
From the
Embedded Web Service
, select the
Maintenance
tab
Application
Management
Application
.
2
From the list, select the application you want to view in details and press
Setting
.
3
A window where you can choose to enable/disable appears. Select the option you
want.
4
Press
OK
.
Erase Stored Job
You can delete secure printing job and stored printing job.
Cloning
You can import or export (transfer) various settings (machine setting, network information,
address book, etc.) between devices that have the
Cloning
feature in
Embedded Web
Service
.
Contact Information
Shows information of a system administrator.
General Settings
You can set
Asset Tag
.
Weblink Options
Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check information. You can also add
useful sites.
- 130 -
Paper Handling
Print Media Guidelines
Storing Print Media
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications
Selecting an Output Location
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
Setting the Paper Size
Setting the Paper Type
Setting the Paper Margin
Setting the Paper Tray
- 131 -
Print Media Guidelines
Print media is paper, card stock, transparencies, labels, and envelopes. Your printer provides
high quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for
your printer helps you to avoid printing problems. This chapter provides information on how
to help you make print media selections, how to care for the print media, and how to load it
in the tray 1, optional tray 2, or MPF.
Paper
For the best print quality, use 80 g/m
2
(20 lb) xerographic, long grain paper. Try a sample of
any paper you are considering using with the printer before buying large quantities.
When loading paper, note the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the
paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray" and "Using the MPF (Multi
purpose feeder)" for detailed loading instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. We recommend that
you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 105 g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb bond)
grain long in the DADF and from 60 to 105g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb bond) grain long in the paper
tray. Paper lighter than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb bond) may not be stiff enough to feed properly,
causing jams. For best performance, use 80 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) long grain paper.
For duplex printing, use 75 to 90 g/m
2
(20 to 24 lb bond) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper
feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is
exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in humid conditions, even in the
paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
The degree of smoothness of the paper directly affects the print quality. If the paper is too
rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the
paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems. Smoothness should be between
100 and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points
produces the best print quality.
- 132 -
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer
to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use
it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its
performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either long
grain, running the length of the paper, or short grain, running the width of the paper.
For 60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to 24 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For papers
heavier than 90 g/m
2
(24 lb bond), grain short is preferred. For the MPF, 60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to
24 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended.
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. This
content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding
problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess
characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 80 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) xerographic
paper. Business papers designed for general business use may also provide acceptable print
quality.
Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When
choosing any print media, consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Use only paper which can withstand these temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or
releasing hazardous emissions. Check with the paper manufacturer or vendor to determine
whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Unacceptable Paper
The following papers are not
recommended for use with the printer:
•
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as
carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page)
greater than 0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•
Recycled papers containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN
19 309
•
Recycled paper having a weight less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
•
Multiple-part forms or documents
±
- 133 -
Selecting Paper
Proper paper loading helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
•
Always use new, undamaged paper.
•
Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper you are using.
This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
•
Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
•
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source; mixing results in
jams.
•
Do not use coated papers.
•
Remember to change the paper size setting when you use a source that does not
support auto size sensing.
•
Do not remove trays while a job is printing.
•
Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the source.
•
Flex paper back and forth. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Selecting Preprinted Forms and Letterhead paper
Use the following guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead paper for the
printer:
• Use long grain papers for best results.
• Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved
printing process.
• Choose papers that absorb ink, but do not bleed.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks which have been designed for use in
xerographic copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without melting
or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or
the silicone in the fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these
requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterheads must be able to withstand temperatures up to 180°C
(356°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
- 134 -
Printing on a Letterhead paper
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead
paper that you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on a letterhead paper. Use the following table
for help when loading a letterhead paper in the print media sources.
Selecting Prepunched Paper
Prepunched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in
manufacturing techniques.
Use the following guidelines to select and use prepunched paper:
• Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of
pre-punched paper.
• Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already
packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through
the printer.
• Prepunched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may
require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as that of
standard paper.
Print Media
Source
Top of Page
Print Side Portrait Landscape
Tray 1 (standard
tray)
Optional tray 2
Print side face down for simplex
(single sided) printing
Front of tray Left side of tray
MPF Face up Logo enters
the printer
first
Left side of tray
- 135 -
Transparencies
Try a sample of any transparencies you are considering using with the printer before buying
large quantities:
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able
to withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies, as this can cause poor print quality.
• Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent the sheets from sticking
together.
• Load one transparency at a time into the MPF.
Selecting Transparencies
The printer can print directly on transparencies which have been designed for use in laser
printers. Print quality and durability depends on the transparency used. Always print samples
on the transparencies you are considering before buying large quantities.
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether your transparencies are
compatible with laser printers that heat transparencies to 180°C (356°F). Use only
transparencies that are able to withstand these temperatures without melting, discoloring,
offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Envelopes
Try a sample of any envelopes you are considering using with the printer before buying large
quantities. See "Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for instructions on loading an
envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
• To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality envelopes that are
designed for use in laser printers.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 80 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) paper. You can
use up to 90 g/m
2
(24 lb bond) weight for the MPF as long as the cotton content is 25
percent or less.
• Use only new, undamaged envelopes.
• For best performance and to minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts or embossing
– Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
–Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have nicked edges or bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
- 136 -
• Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without sealing,
excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts
about the envelopes you are considering using, check with the envelope supplier.
• Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
• Load an envelope with the flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left side.
The end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the MPF first.
See "Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for instructions on loading an envelope.
NOTE: You can improve the printing quality of envelopes by pulling down the
rear door to open and pushing the two blue pressure levers down. This
instruction will be especially helpful for DL and C5 size envelopes.
• A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperatures may
seal the envelopes.
- 137 -
Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed for use with laser printers. These labels are
supplied in letter size, A4 size, and legal size sheets. Label adhesives, face sheet (printable
stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) and pressure
of 25 pounds per square inch (psi). You can load one label sheet at a time in the MPF.
Try a sample of any label you are considering using with the printer before purchasing a
large quantity:
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing,
resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate your printer and your cartridge with
adhesive, and could void your printer and cartridge warranties.
• Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without sealing, excessive
curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not print within 0.04 in. (1 mm) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or
between die-cuts of the label.
• Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. We recommend
zone coating of the adhesive at least 0.04 in. (1 mm) away from edges. Adhesive
material contaminates your printer and could void your warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, a 0.125 in. (3 mm) strip should be
removed on the leading and driver edge, and a non-oozing adhesive should be used.
• Remove a 0.125 in. (3 mm) strip from the leading edge to prevent labels from peeling
inside the printer.
• Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
• Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
Card Stock
Card stock is single ply, and has a large array of properties, such as the moisture content,
thickness, and texture, that can significantly affect print quality. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications" for information on the preferred weight for the grain direction
of print media.
Try a sample of any card stock you are considering using with the printer before purchasing
a large quantity:
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing can significantly affect the print
quality and cause print media handling or jamming problems.
• Avoid using card stock that may release hazardous emissions when heated.
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate
the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the
printer.
• We recommend the use of grain long card stock.
- 138 -
Storing Print Media
Use the following guidelines for proper print media storage. These help avoid print media
feeding problems and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that
they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Identifying Print Media Sources and
Specifications
The following tables provide information on standard and optional sources, including the
print media sizes that you can select from the paper size menu and supported weights.
NOTE: If you use a print media size not listed, select the next larger size.
Media Input Capacity
Media Output Capacity
Papera
a Recommend the use of manual for special media such as transparency, envelope, and card.
Paper Tray 1 Paper Tray 2 MPFb
b For special media in MPF, the feeding quality may be degraded depending on the status of
paper.
Plain paper 250 sheets of 80 g/m2
bond (20 lb)
520 sheets of 80 g/m2
bond (20 lb)
50 sheet of 80 g/m2
bond (20 lb)
Transparencyc,
Labels, Cards,
Envelopes
c Recommend the use of short edge for the paper-backed transparency.
- - 5 sheets of 80 g/m2
bond (20 lb)
Output Location Description
Face down 150 sheets of 80g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper
5 sheets of transparency, envelope, label, and card.
Face upa1 sheetb
- 139 -
Print Media Sizes and Support
a The face up is mainly for envelope and thick paper.
b Push the two blue pressure levers down for better printing quality of envelope, label, card, and
thick paper.
Legend
Y- indicates Support
Dimensions Paper Tray
(tray 1 and
optional tray 2)
MPF Duplex
printing
Print Media Size
A4 8.27 x 11.7 in.
(210 x 297 mm)
YYY
A5a 5.83 x 8.27 in.
(148 x 210 mm)
Y Y -
A6 4.13 x 5.85 in.
(105 x 148.5 mm)
Y Y -
JIS B5 7.17 x 10.1 in.
(182 x 257 mm)
Y Y -
ISO B5 6.93 x 9.84 in.
(176 x 250 mm)
Y Y -
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.
(215.9 x 279.4 mm)
YYY
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.
(215.9 x 355.6 mm)
YYY
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 in.
(184.2 x 266.7 mm)
Y Y -
Oficio 8.5 x 13.5 in.
(216 x 343 mm)
YYY
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.
(216 x 330 mm)
YYY
Envelope Monarch 3.875 x 7.5 in.
(98.4 x 190.5 mm)
-Y-
Envelope No.9 3.87 x 8.87 in.
(98 x 225 mm)
-Y-
Envelope No.10 4.12 x 9.5 in.
(105 x 241 mm)
-Y-
- 140 -
Print Media Supported
Envelope DL 4.33 x 8.66 in.
(110 x 220 mm)
-Y-
EnvelopeC5 6.38 x 9.01 in.
(162 x 229 mm)
-Y-
EnvelopeC6 4.49 x 6.38 in.
(114 x 162 mm)
-Y-
Custom 3.86 x 5.85 in. to 8.5 x
14 in.
(98 x 149 mm to 216 x
356 mm)
-Y-
a Ensure the A5 paper is NOT A4 paper that has been cut in half.
Print Media (Paper) Types Paper Tray
(tray 1 and optional tray 2)
MPF
Plain, Thin, Recycled YY
Thick, Bond, Card Stock , Archive YY
Preprinted -Y
Color -Y
Transparency -Y
Labels -Y
Thicker -Y
Envelopes -Y
Cotton -Y
Legend
Y- indicates Support
Dimensions Paper Tray
(tray 1 and
optional tray 2)
MPF Duplex
printing
Print Media Size
- 141 -
Print Media Types and Weights
Print Media Type Print Media Weight
Tray 1 and Optional Tray 2 MPF
Plain paper Xerographic or
business paper
70 to 85 g/m2
(19 to 23 lbs bond)
70 to 85 g/m2
(19 to 23 lbs bond)
Envelopes 100%
Cotton Content
Sulfite,
wood-free or up
to 100% cotton
bonds
-75-90 g/m
2
(20-24 lb)
Thick paper Xerographic or
business paper
86 to 105 g/m2
(23 to 28 lbs bond)
86 to 105 g/m2
(23 to 28 lbs bond)
Thicker paper Xerographic or
business paper
- 164 to 220 g/m2
(44 to 58 lbs bond)
Thin paper Xerographic or
business paper
60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lbs bond)
60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lbs bond)
Transparency Laser printer - 138 to 146 g/m2
(36.81 to 38.91 lbs
bond)
Labels Paper , Dual-web
paper ,Polyester ,
Vinyl
-120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lbs bond)
Card stock Index Bristol , Tag
, Cover
121 to 163 g/m2
(32 to 43 lbs bond)
121 to 163 g/m2
(32 to 43 lbs bond)
Bond paper Xerographic or
business paper
- 106 to 120 g/m2
(28 to 32 lbs bond)
Minimum size
(custom)
• MPF tray: 76 x
127 mm (3 x
5 inches)
• Tray 1/ Tray 2:
98x 148 mm
(3.84 x 5.84
inches)
• Multi-purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lbs
bond)
• Tray 1/ Tray 2: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond)
- 142 -
Selecting an Output Location
The printer has two output locations; the output tray (face down) and the rear door (face
up).
To use the output tray, ensure that the rear door is closed. To use the rear door, open it.
NOTE: If paper coming out of the output tray has problems, such as excessive curl,
try printing to the rear door.
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear door while the printer is
printing.
Output Tray
Rear Cover
- 143 -
Printing to the Output Tray (Face down)
The output tray collects printed paper face-down, in the correct order. The tray should be
used for most print jobs.
If necessary, expand the paper output extension to keep the print media from falling off the
output tray.
CAUTION: The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.
Printing to the Rear Door (Face up)
Using the rear door, the paper comes out of the printer face up.
Printing from the MPF to the rear door provides a
straight paper path
. Using the rear door
might improve the output quality with special materials.
To use the rear door:
Open the rear door by pulling it.
- 144 -
CAUTION: The fuser area inside of the rear door of your printer becomes very hot
when in use. Take care when you access this area.
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
You can load approximately 250 sheets of plain paper in the tray 1 or the optional tray 2. If
you purchased the optional tray 2, see "Installing an Optional Tray 2" for installing
instructions. For faxing, you can use A4, letter or legal paper only. For copying or printing,
you can use many different types and sizes of paper; see "Identifying Print Media Sources
and Specifications".
Follow these instructions to load print media into the tray 1 or optional tray 2. These trays
are loaded the same way.
1
Pull open the paper tray and load paper with the print side face down.
You can load letterhead paper with the design side face down. The top edge of the
sheet with the logo should be placed at the front side of the tray.
For details about loading paper in the paper tray, see "Loading Paper".
NOTE: If you experience problems with paper feed, place the paper in the MPF.
NOTE: You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be facing up
with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed,
turn the paper around. Note that the print quality is not guaranteed.
- 145 -
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
Use the MPF to print transparencies, labels, envelopes or postcards in addition to making
quick runs of paper types or sizes that are not currently loaded in the paper tray.
Postcards, 3.5 by 5.83 in. (index) cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with
this printer. The minimum size is 3.0 by 5.0 in. (76 by 127 mm) and the maximum size is 8.5
by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm).
Acceptable print materials are plain paper with sizes ranging from 3.0 by 5.0 in. (76 by 127
mm) to Legal, 8.5 by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm), the largest size acceptable, and weighing
between 16 lb and 43 lb.
NOTE: Always load only the print materials specified in the Specifications on
"Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications" to avoid paper jams and print
quality problems.
NOTE: Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before loading them into
the MPF.
To use the MPF:
1
Open the MPF and unfold the paper support extension, as shown.
2
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages
before loading.
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side. Oils
from your fingers can cause print quality problems.
- 146 -
3
Load the print material
with the side to be printed on facing up
.
Depending on the paper type you are using, keep the following loading method:
• Envelopes: load them with the flap side down and with the stamp area on the top
left side.
• Transparencies: load them with the print side up and the top with the adhesive
strip entering the printer first.
• Labels: load them with the print size up and the top short edge entering the
printer first.
• Preprinted paper: load with the design face up, top edge toward the printer.
• Card stock: load them with the print side up and the short edge entering the
printer first.
• Pre printed paper: the printed side should be facing down with an uncurled edge
toward the printer.
4
Squeeze the width guide and adjust it to the width of the print material. Do not force
too much, or the paper will be bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.
- 147 -
5
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the MPF. See "Setting the Paper
Type" for copying and faxing or "
Paper
Tab" for Computer printing.
NOTE: The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the
operator panel.
CAUTION: Ensure that the rear door opens when you print on transparencies.
If not, they may tear while exiting the machine.
6
After printing, fold away the paper support extension and close the MPF.
Tips on using the MPF
• Load only one size of print material at a time in the MPF.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in the MPF. This also
applies to other types of print materials.
• Print materials should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the MPF first and
be placed in the center of the tray.
• Always load only the print materials specified in "Print Media Guidelines" to avoid paper
jams and print quality problems.
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the MPF.
• When you print on 3 by 5 in. (76 by 127 mm) sized media on the MPF, open the rear
door for a straight paper path to avoid paper jams.
• Ensure that the rear door opens when you print on transparencies. If not, they may
tear while exiting the machine.
- 148 -
Setting the Paper Size
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size from the operator panel.
This setting will apply to Fax and Copy modes. For Computer printing, you need to select
the paper type in the application program you use.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Paper Setup
from the main screen.
2
Press the paper tray you want to use.
3
Press the
Paper Size
.
4
Press the paper size you are using.
5
Press the
Check
( ) to complete.
Setting the Paper Type
After loading paper in the paper tray or the MPF, you need to set the paper type from the
operator panel. This setting will apply to Fax and Copy modes. For faxing, you can only set
the paper type to the
Plain
mode. For Computer printing, you need to select the paper type
in the application program you use.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Paper Setup
from the main screen.
2
Press the paper tray you want to use.
3
Press the
Paper Type
.
4
Press the paper type you are using.
5
Press the
Check
( ) to complete.
Setting the Paper Margin
You can set the paper margin for simplex or duplex printing.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Paper Setup
Margin
from the main
screen.
2
Press the paper tray you want to use.
3
Press the printing type you want to use.
4
Select a target such as
Top Margin
,
Left Margin
,
Short Binding
,
Long Binding
, and etc.
to set the paper margin.
5
Adjust the option you want using the left/right arrows
6
Press the
Check
( ) to complete.
- 149 -
Setting the Paper Tray
This feature allows you to select the tray and paper that you want to use for a printing job.
Paper size and paper tray are adjusted here.
Setting the Tray linking
If tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and this option is
On
,
then the machine continues printing using the paper in tray 2.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Press the
Tray Behavior
.
3
Press
Tray Linking
.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the
On
you want to use.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Substitute Tray
When the paper is mismatched, meaning that tray 1 is filled with the letter size paper, but the
printing job needs A4 size paper, the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized
paper.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Press the
Tray Behavior
.
3
Press the
Substitute Tray
.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select
Nearest Size
.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting the Default Tray
You can select the tray you want to use for printing job.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Press the
Tray Behavior
.
3
Press the
Default Source
.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the paper tray you are using.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 150 -
Setting the paper feeding flow
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Press the
Tray Behavior
.
3
Press the
Configure MPF
.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the paper tray you are using.
•
Tray Mode
: When sending a print job from the computer, the printer uses paper in
the tray which you have already set in Printer properties. In this mode the MPF is
treated as another paper tray. Instead of treating MPF as first preference paper
source, printer pulls paper from the tray that matches the size and type. The first
preference goes to the default source.
•
Bypass Mode
: When sending a print job from the computer and the MPF is filled
with paper, the printer uses the paper in the MPF first. In this mode the printer
pulls the paper from MPF first unless it is closed or empty. MPF gets the highest
priority and pulls whatever media present in the MPF.
Bypass Mode
is set as a
default setting.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Setting the paper auto feeding
When the paper is mismatched, the machine waits for a while (about few seconds) and
starts printing automatically even if the paper mismatches.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Press the
Tray Behavior
.
3
Press the
Auto Continue
.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select the
On
you want to use.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Substitute Size
This setting is used to determine whether the printer can substitute with another paper size
when the requested paper size is not available in any of the input trays. The Printer will
substitute A4/Letter, A5/Statement, B5/ISO B5, and Folio/Oficio. For example if A4 is
requested paper size and there is no A4 paper in any of the input source then the printer will
print on Letter size paper, if available.
Substitute size set to
Off
means no substitution is allowed for the requested paper size. This
option is not applied for received fax printing.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print and copy job.
Configure MPF
MPF can be configured to behave in
Tray Mode
or in
Bypass Mode
by setting the
Configure
MPF
menu in the operator panel.
- 151 -
Bypass Mode
In this mode the printer pulls the paper from MPF first unless it is closed or empty. MPF gets
the highest priority and pulls whatever media is present in the MPF.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print and copy job.
Tray Mode
In this mode the MPF is treated as another paper tray. Instead of treating MPF as first
preference paper source, printer pulls paper from the tray that matches the size and type.
The first preference goes to the default source.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print, copy, and fax job.
- 152 -
Printing
Printing a Document
Opening printing preferences
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper
Change Percentage of Your Document
Printing Posters
Printing Booklets
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Using Watermarks
Using Overlays
- 153 -
Printing a Document
The following
Printing Preferences
window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select
Print
from the
File
menu.
3
Select your machine from the
Select Printer
list.
4
Select the printer driver that you want to use from the Print window.
5
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected
within the Print window.
6
To start the print job, click
OK
or
Print
in the Print window.
Canceling a Print Job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows:
• You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
in the
Windows task bar.
• You can also cancel the current job by pressing
on screen.
Ensure that your printer is
selected.
Windows 7
- 154 -
Opening printing preferences
•The
Printing Preferences
window that appears in this user’s guide may differ
depending on the machine in use.
•When you select an option in
Printing Preferences
, you may see a
warning mark
or . an mark means you can select that certain option but it is not
recommended, and an mark means you cannot select that option due to
the machine’s setting or environment.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select
Print
from the file menu. The
Print
window appears.
3
Select your machine from the
Select Printer
.
4
Click
Properties
or
Preferences
.
NOTE: The screenshot may differ depending on model.
- 155 -
Basic Tab
The
Basic
tab provides options for you to adjust how the document appears on the printed
page. The
Layout Options
section includes advanced printing options, such as
Multiple
Pages Per Side
and
Poster Printing
.
Property Description
Orientation Orientation allows you to select the direction in which information is
printed on a page.
•
Portrait
prints across the width of the page, letter style.
•
Landscape
prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet style.
If you want to rotate the page 180-degrees, check Rotate 180
Degrees.
Mirror Image specifies mirrored output. Check to print a mirror
image of the document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. This
feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
Layout
Options
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options. For
details, see "Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper",
"Printing Posters" and "Printing Booklets".
Portrait
Landscape
- 156 -
Paper Tab
Use the following options to set the paper handling needs when you access the printer
properties. Click the
Paper
tab to access the paper properties.
NOTE: When you select an option in properties, you may see an exclamation ( )
mark or ( ) mark. An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option
but it is no recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due
to the printer’s setting or environment.
Double-Sided
Printing
Double-Sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper. For
details, see "Printing on Both Sides of Paper".
Property Description
- 157 -
Property Description
Print Mode Print Mode allows you to select how to print or save the printing file
by using the storage(mass storage device,printer memory,internal
flash drive, RAM Disk). Select the desired one of the following
settings:
Print Mode
•
Normal
: Select this setting for normal printing without storing your
documents in printer storage.
•
Proof
: This setting is available when you make more than two
copies. The printer prints the first copy, and then waits so that you
can check the printing if there is any problem. After checking, you
can continue printing the remaining copies.
•
Confidential
: Select this setting to send your private or confidential
document with a specified password to printer storage so that you
can prevent the other users from accessing it. To print the
document, you must enter the password. After printing, the
document is cleared from printer storage.
•
Store
: Select this setting to save a document in the hard disk
without printing. When you want to save your document in a private
document box, you must enter the password. Use this setting with a
private document box when you store a private or a confidential
document.
•
Store and Print
: Select this setting to save a document in the hard
disk and print it. When you want to save your document in a private
document box, you must enter the password. Use this setting with
private document box when you store a private or a confidential
document.
•
Spool
: This option can be useful to handle large amount of data. If
you select this setting, the print spools the document into printer
storage and then prints it from printer storage queue, decreasing the
computer's work load.
•
Print Schedule
: Select this setting to print the document at a
specified time. If you set the time to 11 PM when the printer is hardly
used, the printer stores the document in printer storage and prints it
at 11 PM.
The
Job Properties
options are available as below.
•
Job Name
: Enter the name of the print job. It can be used when
you print the file at a later time or when find the saved file using
the printer's control panel.
•
User ID
: Enter the user's ID. It can be used when you print the file
at a later time or when find the saved file using the printer's
control panel.
- 158 -
Print Mode
(Continue)
Password : Enter the password in which will be used for Confidential
setting. This setting is available only when you select Confidential,
Store or Store and Print with selecting any private document box. If
you set the password a specific file, you must enter the password to
print or delete the file.
Print At : Select this setting to set the time when the printer begins
printing. You can use this setting only if you select Print Schedule.
Copies Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed. You
can enter up to 999.
Original Size
/ Output Size
The Original Size option allows you to choose the size of paper
loaded in the paper tray.
If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Edit.... When the
Custom Paper Size Setting window appears, set the paper size and
click OK. The setting appears on the list so that you can select it.
The Output Size option allows you to choose the size of output
paper. You can choose drop/down list or set the Percentage.
Source Ensure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.
If the paper source is set to Auto Select, the printer automatically
picks up print materials from the MPF first and then the paper tray.
Type Ensure that Type is set to Printer Default. If you load a different type
of print material, select the corresponding paper type. For more
information about print materials, refer to "Print Media Guidelines".
Advanced This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper
type from the rest of the document. You can select the paper source
for the first page. This feature is not available when using the
PostScript (PS) driver.
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to the
default setting.
Property Description
- 159 -
Graphic Tab
Use the following graphic options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs.
Click the
Graphic
tab to display the properties shown below.
Property Description
Quality You can select the printing resolution by choosing from
Best
or
Normal
. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed
characters and graphics. Higher settings may increase the time it
takes to print a document.
- 160 -
Font / Text All Text Black
When the All Text Black option is checked, all text in your
document is allowed to print solid black, regardless of the color it
appears on the screen. When it is not checked, colored text is
allowed to print in shades of gray.
Advanced
True Type Options determines what the driver tells the printer
about how to image the text in your document. Select the
appropriate setting according to the status of your document.
•
Download as Outline
: When this option is selected, the driver will
download any TrueType fonts that are used in your documents,
which is not stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a
document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose
Download as bit image and resubmit your print job. The
Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing
Adobe.
•
Download as Bit Image
: When this option is selected, the driver
downloads the font data as bitmap images. Documents with
complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, print faster in this
setting.
•
Print as Graphics
: When this option is selected, the driver
downloads any fonts as graphics. When printing documents with
high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing
performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting.
Property Description
- 161 -
Font / Text
(continue)
Use Printer Fonts
When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that
are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document,
rather than downloading the fonts that have been used in your
document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this
option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer fonts,
the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to
those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your
document that are very different from those resident in the printer,
your printed output will appear very different from what it looks
like on the screen.
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to
the default setting.
Graphic
Controller
This feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
Negative Effect: allows users to print a negative of image by
reversing the values for black and white.
Toner Save Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and
reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print
quality.
NOTE: You also change Toner Save in the Printer Settings
Utility.
Property Description
- 162 -
Advanced Tab
Property Description
Watermark You can create a background image of text to print on each page
of your document. See "Using Watermarks".
Overlay This feature is available only when using the PCL driver. Overlays
are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and
letterhead paper. See "Using Overlays".
- 163 -
Output Options Print Order
You can set the sequence for the pages to print. Select the print
order from the drop-down list.
•
Normal
: Your printer prints all pages from the first page to the
last page.
•
Reverse All Pages
: Your printer prints all pages from the last page
to the first page.
•
Print Odd Pages
: Your printer prints only the odd pages of the
document.
•
Print Even Pages
: Your printer prints only the even pages of the
document.
•
Skip Blank Pages
: This option allows you to specify not to print
blank pages in the original data.
•
Manual Margin
: This option allows you to specify binding
margin. Binding margin adjusts binding position. This option is
not available when you use the PS printer driver.
Advanced (This feature is available only when using the PostScript
(PS) driver.)
PostScript Options
•
Output Option
: specifies the output format for PostScript files.
–
Optimize for Speed
: Generally, you will use this option to print
your documents.
–
Optimize for Portability
: If you want to create a file that
conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring
Conventions(ADSC), select it. Each page of the document will
be a self-contained object. This is useful if you want to create a
PostScript file and print it on a different printer.
–
Encapsulated PostScript(EPS)
: If you want to include the file
as an image in another document that will be printed from a
different program, select it.
–
Archive Format
: If you want to create a PostScript file you can
use later, select it.
•
PostScript Language
: specifies which PostScript language level
to use. Some printers support multiple levels. It is usually best to
select the highest number available, since a higher language level
provides more features.
Property Description
- 164 -
Output Options
(Continue)
•
PostScript PassThrough
: specifies whether to print a PostScript
data created by the application that can create the PostScript
code for printing. The default is Auto. If selecting Auto or On,
some print options such as multiple page per side, watermark,
booklet, scaling (or output size) and poster may not work
correctly when printing from the application that can create the
PostScript code for printing. In that case, please change this
option to off.
–
Auto
: Driver determines automatically whether to print a
PostScript data created by the application, according to some
print options which user wants to use.
–
On
: Driver prints a PostScript data created by the application.
–
Off
: Driver doesn't print a PostScript data created by the
application.
NOTE: In some cases, to turn off PostScript PassThrough
may cause unexpected printout.
•
Send PostScript Error Handler
: specifies whether a PostScript
error handler message is sent. If you want the printer to print an
error page when an error occurs in the print job, check this
option.
Security You can set the job encryption.
Property Description
- 165 -
Job Accounting Job Accounting enables you to associate User and Account
identification information with each document you print.
•
Admin Job Accounting Settings
: You can enable this option and
configure job accounting settings to share job accounting
information with clients.
•
Accounting Type
: You can select an accounting type specified
by your system administrator.
•
Accounting
: You can enable print authentication by user ID and
password.
•
ID Only
: You can enable print authentication by user ID only.
–
User permission
: If a user click on this option, the printing job's
validity is determined based on the level of the user's access
and control.
–
Group permission
: If a user click on this option, the printing
job's validity is determined based on the level of group's access
and control that the user is member of.
•
Confirm name/password when printing
: You can confirm your
user ID or password during printing.
NOTE: This may not work in shared environment.
Property Description
- 166 -
Dell Tab
Use the
Dell
tab to display the copyright notice and the version number of the driver. If you
have an Internet browser, you can connect to the Internet by clicking the
Dell Website
icon.
Using a Favorite Setting
The
Favorite
option, which is visible on each properties tab, allows you to save the current
properties settings for future use.
To save a
Favorite
item:
1
Change the settings on each tab, as needed.
2
Enter a name for the item in the
Favorite
input box.
3
Click
Add
().
To use a saved setting, select it from the
Favorite
drop-down list. The machine is now set to
print according to the setting you selected.
To delete a saved setting, select it from the
Favorite
drop-down list and click
Delete
().
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting
Printer Default
from the
list.
- 167 -
Using Help
Click the option you want to know on the
Printing Preferences
window and press
F1
on
your keyboard.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the
Printing
Preferences
window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the
Help
option.
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than
one page per sheet, the pages will appear decreased in size and arranged on the sheet. You
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the
Basic
tab, choose
Multiple Pages Per Side
on the
Type
drop-down list.
1 2
3 4
- 168 -
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) on the
Pages
per Side
drop-down list.
4
If necessary, select the page order on the
Page Order
drop-down list.
Check
Print Page Border
to print a border around each page on the sheet.
Print Page
Border
is enabled only if the
Pages per Side
setting is set to a number greater than
one.
5
Click the
Paper
tab and select the paper source, size, and type.
6
Click
OK
and print the document.
Right, Then
Down
1
3
2
4
1
2
3
4
2
4
1
3
3
4
1
2
Down, Then
Right
Left, Then
Down
Down, Then
Left
- 169 -
Change Percentage of Your Document
You can scale your print job on a page.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the
Paper
tab.
3
Enter the scaling rate in the
Percentage
input box.
You can also click the or button.
4
Select the paper source, size, and type.
5
Click
OK
and print the document.
- 170 -
Printing Posters
You can print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of
pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the
Basic
tab, select
Poster Printing
in the
Type
drop-down list.
2 x 2
s
- 171 -
3
Select the page layout you want.
Specification of the page layout:
•
Poster 2x2
: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.
•
Poster 3x3
: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.
•
Poster 4x4
: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages.
4
Select the
Poster Overlap
value. Specify
Poster Overlap
in millimeters or inches by
selecting the radio button on the upper right of
Basic
tab to make it easier to paste the
sheets together.
5
Click the
Paper
tab and select the paper source, size, and type.
6
Click
OK
and print the document. You can complete the poster by reconstructing the
results.
0.1 inches
0.1 inches
- 172 -
Printing Booklets
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and
arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a
booklet.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the
Basic
tab, select
Booklet Printing
in the
Type
drop-down list.
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order
to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the paper size in the
Size option on the Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout
Options drop-down list on the Basic tab is activated.
3
Select the paper source, size, and type.
4
Click
OK
and print the document.
8
9
- 173 -
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Your printer prints on both sides of the paper automatically.
Before printing, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished
document. The binding options are:
•
Long Edge
, which is the conventional layout used in book binding.
•
Short Edge
, which is the type often used with calendars.
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or thick
paper. Damage to the printer and paper jamming might result.
NOTE: To use the double-sided printing, you can use only the following paper size:
A4, Letter, Legal and Folio.
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
From the
Basic
tab, select the paper orientation.
2
5
3
25
3
25
3
2
5
3
Long Edge Short Edge
- 174 -
3
From the
Double-Sided Printing
section, select the desired binding option.
4
Click the
Paper
tab and select the paper source, size and type.
5
Click
OK
and print the document.
Your printer prints on both sides of the paper automatically.
- 175 -
Using Watermarks
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you
may want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally
across the first page or all pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with your printer. They can be modified
or you can add new ones to the list.
Using an Existing Watermark
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the
Advanced
tab and select a watermark on the
Watermark
drop-down list. It
appears in the preview image window.
3
Click
OK
and start printing.
Preview image
- 176 -
Creating a Watermark
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the
Advanced
tab and click
Edit...
in the
Watermark
section. The Edit
Watermarks window appears.
3
Enter the text message you want to print in the
Watermark Message
box.
The message displays in the preview image window. The preview image is provided so
that you can see how the watermark will appear on the printed page.
When the
First Page Only
box is checked, the watermark is printed on the
first page
only
.
NOTE: You can enter up to 256 letters.
4
Select the watermark options.
You can select the font name, style and size and gray scale level from the
Font
Attributes
section and set the angle of the watermark from the
Message Angle
section.
5
Click
Add
to add a new watermark to the list.
6
When you finish creating, click
OK
and start printing.
To stop printing the watermark, select
None
on the
Watermark
drop-down list.
Editing a Watermark
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the
Advanced
tab and click
Edit...
in the
Watermark
section. The
Edit
Watermarks
window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to edit from the
Current Watermarks
list and change
the watermark message and options.
4
Click
Update
to save the changes.
5
Click
OK
.
Deleting a Watermark
1
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
2
Click the
Advanced
tab and click
Edit...
in the
Watermark
section. The Edit
Watermarks window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to delete on the
Current Watermarks
list and click
Delete
.
4
Click
OK
.
- 177 -
Using Overlays
What is an Overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special
file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place
of preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can
create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead.
To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted
letterhead paper in the printer. You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay
on your document.
Creating a New Page Overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as documents you will print
with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay.
Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. If
needed, save the file for later use.
2
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
WORLD BEST
- 178 -
3
Click the
Advanced
tab and click
Edit...
in the
Overlay
section.
4
In the
Edit Overlays
window, click
Create
.
- 179 -
5
In the
Save As
window, type a name of up to eight characters in the
File name
box.
Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is
C:\FormOver
).
6
Click
Save
. You can see the name in the
Overlay List
.
7
Click
OK
or
Yes
until you complete creating.
The file is not printed out; it is stored in your computer.
Using a Page Overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an
overlay with a document:
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay must be the same as the resolution of the
document that will print with the overlay.
1
Create or open the document you want to print.
2
When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.
3
Click the
Advanced
tab.
4
Select the desired overlay from the
Text
drop-down list box.
- 180 -
5
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the
Text
drop-down list, select
Edit...
from the list and click
Load
. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored
the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when
you access the Load window.
After you select the file, click
Open
. The file is now shown in the
Overlay List
box and
is available for printing. Select the overlay from the
Overlay List
box.
6
If necessary, click
Confirm Page Overlay When Printing
. When this box is checked, a
message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you
to confirm that you want to print an overlay on your document.
Answering
Yes
to the window means that the selected overlay will be printed with your
document. Answering
No
to the window cancels the use of the overlay page.
If this box is empty and an overlay has been selected, the overlay will be automatically
printed with your document.
7
Click
OK
or
Yes
until the printing starts.
The overlay is downloaded with your print job and printed on your document.
- 181 -
Deleting a Page Overlay
You can delete page overlays that are no longer used.
1
In the printer properties window, click the
Advanced
tab.
2
Click
Edit...
in the
Overlay
section.
3
Select the overlay you want to delete from the
Overlay List
box.
4
Click
Delete
.
5
When a confirming message window appears, click
Yes
.
6
Click
OK
until you exit the
Print
window.
- 182 -
Copying
Loading Paper for Copying
Selecting the Paper Tray
Preparing a Document
Loading an Original Document
Making Copies
Using Copy and Setting Options
Changing the Default Settings
- 183 -
Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print materials are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or
copying. For further details, see "Loading Paper" for loading paper in the paper tray and
"Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for loading paper in the multi purpose tray.
Selecting the Paper Tray
After loading the print media for copy output, you have to select the paper tray that you will
use for the copy job.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Tray
.
3
Select the paper tray you want.
You can select from
Tray1
,
Tray2
(option) and
MPF
(multi purpose tray). If you do not
install the optional tray 2, the
Tray2
(option)
menu item will not appear on the display.
4
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) to load
an original document for copying, scanning and sending a fax. Using the DADF, you can
load up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m
2
(20 lb) documents for one job. Using the document glass,
you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, use the document glass instead of the DADF.
When you use the DADF:
• Do not load documents smaller than 5.59 by 5.83 in. (142 by 148 mm) or larger than
8.5 by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm).
• Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents:
– Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
– Coated paper
– Onion skin or thin paper
– Wrinkled or creased paper
– Curled or rolled paper
– Torn paper
– Corner damage caused by excessive stapling/removal.
- 184 -
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading documents.
• Ensure that any glue, ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before
loading documents.
• Do not load documents containing different sizes or weights of paper.
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies or documents having other unusual
characteristics.
Loading an Original Document
You can use the DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) or the document glass to load
an original document. Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m
2
(20 lb)
paper at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the
DADF, it has priority over the document on the document glass.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use
the document glass instead of the DADF.
NOTE: If you use duplex copy features, see "Changing the Default Settings".
To load the document in the DADF:
1
Place the document(s) face up on the DADF with the top edge of the documents in
first
- 185 -
2
Adjust the document width guides to the correct document size. Ensure that the
bottom of the document stack matches the paper size marked on the document input
tray.
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document, see "Preparing a
Document".
To load the document in the document glass:
1
Open the document cover.
- 186 -
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document, see "Preparing a
Document".
3
Close the document cover.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until
its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open.
NOTE: Leaving the cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and
toner consumption.
- 187 -
Making Copies
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Contaminating on the document glass may cause black spots on the
printout. For best results, clean the document glass before use. See "Cleaning the
scanner".
1
Load the document(s) face up with the top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the darkness,
and the image quality by using the operator panel. See "Using Copy and Setting
Options".
3
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
Using Copy and Setting Options
The
Copy
menus on the operator panel let you customize all the basic copy options;
number of copies, duplex, zoom, darkness, original size, original type, tray, layout, collation,
stamp and watermark. Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing
Start
( ) to make copies.
Number of Copies
You can select the number of copies from 1 to 199.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to find
Number of Copies
.
3
Press the -/+ buttons to select the number of copies you want.
4
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
- 188 -
Duplex
You can set the printer to print copies on both sides of paper.
1
Load the documents to be copied in the DADF.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Copy
from the home screen
3
Press the left/right arrows to select
Duplex
.
4
Select the binding option you want.
•
1->1 side
: Prints in normal mode.
•
1->2 Side Long Edge
: Prints pages to be read like a book.
•
1->2 Side Short Edge
: Prints pages to be read by flipping through it like a note
pad.
•
2->1 Side Long Edge
: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of them on
a separate sheet.
•
2->1 Side Short Edge
: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each one on a
separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is rotate 180°.
•
2->2 Side Long Edge
: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of
the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals.
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
Zoom
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent,
when you copy original documents from the document glass or the DADF.
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
To select from the predefined copy sizes:
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Zoom
.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select the zoom rate you want.
4
You can select from
Auto Fit
, 25~400%.
NOTE:
If a document is detected in the DADF, the
Auto Fit
does not work.
Darkness
Adjust the darkness to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen
2
Press the left/right arrows to find
Darkness
.
3
Press the -/+ buttons to select level(-5 ~ 5) you want.
4
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
- 189 -
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
Original Size
You can set the size of a copied image, when you copy original documents from the
documents glass or the DADF.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Original Size
.
3
select the original size you want.
Original Type
The original type setting is used to improve the image quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Original Type
. .
3
Select the image quality mode you want.
•
Text
: Use for documents with fine details, such as fine text.
•
Text & Photo
: Use for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
•
Photo
: Use for documents with photo or gray tones.
Tray
You can select the paper tray that you will use for the copy job.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Tray
.
3
Select the paper tray you want.
You can select from
Tray1
,
Tray2
(option) and
MPF
(multi purpose tray). If you do not
install the optional tray 2, the
Tray2
(option)
menu item will not appear on the display.
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Layout
Adjusts the layout format such as
2-Up
,
4-Up
,
ID
,
Booklet
,
Clone
,
Poster
,
Book
.
- 190 -
2-Up or 4-Up copying (N-up)
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet
of paper. This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
DADF.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu for making a 2 Up or
4 Up copy.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Copy
Layout
2-Up
or
4-Up
from the home screen.
OR
Press
Multiple-Up Copy
Multiple-Up
2-Up
or
4-Up
from the home screen.
3
Select
2-Up
or
4-Up
.
•
2-Up
: Copies two separate originals onto one page.
•
4-Up
: Copies four separate originals onto one page.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select
Portrait
or
Landscape
according to the original
paper’s orientation.
5
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, darkness,
original size, and original type. See "Using Copy and Setting Options".
6
Press to go to the upper menu.
7
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
Booklet Copying
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which are then folded
to produce a booklet with all the pages in the correct sequence.
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the
selected paper.
1 2
2-up copying
(Portrait)
2-up copying
(Landscape)
1 2
3 4
4-up copying
(Portrait)
4-up copying
(Landscape)
2
1
- 191 -
To make the booklet copying:
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Copy
Layout
Booklet
from the home screen.
3
Press the appropriate option.
•
Off
: Disables this feature.
•
1 Sided Original
: Copies from one side of the original to one page of a booklet.
•
2 Sided Original Book
: Copies each side of an original to one page of a booklet.
•
2 Sided Original Calendar
: Copies each side of an original to one page of a
booklet. The second side of each original is rotated 180 degrees so the text will be
upright in the booklet.
4
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
ID Copying
When you copy using this feature, the printer prints one side on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the original. This feature is helpful for
copying a small-sized document, such as a name card.
If the original document is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
document glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the ID copying feature does not
work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu for ID copying.
To make the ID copying:
1
Press
Copy
Layout
ID
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
ID
from the home screen.
2
Place the front side of an original facing down on the document glass where arrows
indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.
3
Press the
Next
() button.
4
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, darkness,
original type, and original size by pressing
Options
. See "Using Copy and Setting
Options".
- 192 -
5
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
6
Turn the original over and place it on the document glass, where arrows indicate as
shown then, close the scanner lid.
7
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
Clone Copying
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
document glass. If a document is detected on the DADF, the
Clone
copying feature does
not work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu while making a clone
copy.
To make the
Clone
copying:
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select
Layout
Clone
.
4
If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, darkness,
original type, and original size by pressing
Options
. See "Using Copy and Setting
Options"..
5
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
- 193 -
Poster Copying
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document
glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the Poster copying feature does not work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu button for making a
poster.
To make the
Poster
copying:
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select
Layout
Poster
.
4
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
Your original document is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and printed
one by one in the following order:
- 194 -
Book Copying
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are
engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If the book or magazine is thicker
than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
document glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the book copying feature does not
work.
1
Place a single document face down on the glass as below :
2
Press
Copy
Layout
Book
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Book Copy
from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select you want.
•
Both
: Prints both facing pages of the book.
•
Left
: Prints left page of the book.
•
Right
: Prints right page of the book.
4
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
- 195 -
Collation
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of a 3 page original,
one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document.
To make the
Collate
copying:
NOTE: The menu items of Collate Copy, 2-Up, and 4-Up may be available only
when you loaded the document in the DADF.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select
Collation
.
4
Select you want.
•
On
: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
•
•
Off
: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
Stamp
You can manage document using prints the date and time, page number or user ID on
printouts.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Stamp
.
OR
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Stamp
.
In case of this method, inactive in
Copy
menu and do not apply to fax pritouts.
- 196 -
3
Select the options you want.
•
Item
: Prints the time and date, IP address, page number, device information,
comment, or user ID, to the copy output.
•
Opacity
: You can select the
transparent
or
opaque
.
•
Position
: Sets the position.
Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you
use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed
diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
1
Press
Copy
from the home screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to select
Watermark
.
3
Select options you want.
•
Message
: Select the text message.
•
Text Size
: Select the text message size.
•
Position
: Select the text message position.
•
Darkness
: Select the text darkness.
•
1st Page Only
: Select to print the option only the first page.
Eco Copying
You can cut toner consumption and paper usage.
To make the
Eco
copying:
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Eco Copy
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Eco Copy
from the home screen.
3
If necessary, customize the copy settings. See "Using Copy and Setting Options"
4
Press
Start
( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press ( ) on screen, and
the copying will stop.
- 197 -
Changing the Default Settings
The copy options, including darkness, image quality, copy size, and the number of copies,
can be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the default
settings are used unless they are changed by using the operator panel.
To create your own default settings:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Default Setting
Copy Default
Common
from the home screen.
2
Select the option you want.
3
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 198 -
Scanning
Scanning Overview
Scan to Email
Scan to PC/Network PC
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server
Scan to Fax Server
Scan to WSD
Email & Fax
Scanning from image editing program
Scanning using the WIA driver
- 199 -
Scanning Overview
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be
stored on your computer. Then you can fax or email the files, upload them to your website,
or use them to create projects that you can print.
The scanning methods are scan to email, scan to computer (local and network), and scan to
USB.
Use your
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
to convert pictures and
text into editable images on your computer. After you install the software from the Drivers
and Documentation CD, you can scanning images using
Dell Scan Manager
, which enables
you to scan a document on your printer as a JPEG, TIFF or PDF and save it to a
network-connected computer. Or, you can send the scanned image as an Email
attachment directly from the printer.
NOTE: If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe PhotoShop, you
must assign the application to the printer by selecting it from the list of available
applications.
- 200 -
Scan to Email
Setting up an email account
1
Access the
Embedded Web Service
. See "Required web browser"
2
Select
Settings
Network Settings
Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP)
.
3
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
4
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
5
Check the box next to
SMTP Requires Authentication
to require authentication.
6
Enter the SMTP server Log in name and password.
7
Press
Apply
.
NOTE: If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a
check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication.
NOTE: Enter the IP address and port number.
Scanning and sending an email
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Scan to Email
from the home screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select
Send Email
.
4
Enter the recipient’s email address using
Direct Input
or
Address
( ) from the
screen.
5
If necessary, customize the scan settings including scan resolution, scan color, scan
format, pdf encryption, duplex, original size and original type by using
Setting
()
from the screen.
- 201 -
6
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the Email.
Scan to PC/Network PC
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Scan to PC
or
Scan to Network PC
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Scan to PC
or
Scan to Network PC
from the home
screen.
3
Press the up/down arrows until the application program you want.
If you select
Scan to Network PC
, select your computer ID and password using the
pop-up keyboard.
NOTE: ID is the same ID/Password as the registered scan ID for
Dell Printer
Manager
Switch to advanced mode Scan to PC Settings.
4
The selected application window opens. Adjust the scan settings and scan. For details,
please refer to the user’s guide of the application.
5
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the scanned data to
Dell Printer Manager
.
NOTE: If you selected My Document scanned image is saved in computer's My
Document My Pictures Dell folder.
→
→
→
→
- 202 -
NOTE: You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Dell Scan Manager
program.
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server
Setting up an Network Folder/FTP server
1
Access the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
. See "Embedded Web Service"
2
Select
Address Book
Individual
Add
.
3
Check the box next to
Add FTP
or
Add Network Folder
.
4
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
5
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
6
Check the box next to
Anonymous
, then the server permits the access of
unauthorized people.
7
Enter the Log in name and password.
8
Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain, otherwise just
enter your computer name which is registered to the
Network Folder
.
9
Enter the path for saving the scanned image.
•The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.
•
The folder properties need to be setup as a share.
•Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder.
10
Press
Apply
.
- 203 -
Scanning and sending to Network Folder/FTP server
1
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Press
All Applicatons
()
Scan to FTP
or
Scan to Network Folder
from the home
screen.
4
Select a server and scan format you want.
5
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified
server.
- 204 -
Scan to Fax Server
Fax server will deliver the fax/Email data to send out the job. The Email is automatically
processed by fax server and sent to the given recipient.
First, the printer sends the scanned data to the fax server. Then, the fax server uses PSTN to
send a fax/Email data to recipient.
To use fax server features as scan to Email, you first need to configure the network settings.
See "Embedded Web Service" for network parameters.
1
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Press
All Applicatons
()
Scan to Fax Server
from the home screen.
4
Enter the remote fax phone number using
Direct Input
or
Fax List
.
5
Select a server and scan format you want.
6
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the email.
- 205 -
Scan to WSD
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the computer
supports the WSD (Web Service for Device) feature. To use the WSD feature, you need to
install the WSD printer driver on your computer. For Windows 7, you can install the WSD
driver by
Control Panel
Devices and Printers
Add a printer
. Click
Add a network
printer
from the wizard.
NOTE: The WSD feature works only with Windows Vista® or later version that are
the WSD-compliant computer.
NOTE: The following installation steps are based on Windows 7 computer.
Installing a WSD Printer Driver
NOTE: For install WSD printer, printer driver should be installed.
1
Select
Start
Control Panel
Devices and Printers
Add a printer
.
2
Click
Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer
from the wizard.
3
In the printers list, select the one you want to use, and then click
Next
.
NOTE: The IP address for WSD printer is http://IP address/ws/ (example: http://
111.111.111.111/ws/).
NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, click The printer that I want
isn’t listed Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and select
Web Services Device from Device type. Then enter the printer's IP address.
4
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Scanning using the WSD feature
1
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Press
Scan to WSD
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Scan to WSD
from the home screen.
4
Select your computer name from
Destination List
.
5
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scan and save your scanned image to the WSD server.
- 206 -
Email & Fax
Scans the originals and send the scanned data to Email and Fax at once.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Email & Fax
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Email & Fax
from the home screen.
3
Enter the recipient’s Email address and fax phone number using
Direct Input
or
Address
( ) from the screen.
4
If necessary, customize the scan settings including scan resolution, scan color, scan
format, pdf encryption, duplex, original size ,original type and etc by using
Setting
( ) from the screen.
5
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends Email and fax.
- 207 -
Scanning from image editing program
You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as Adobe
Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below to scan with
TWAIN-compliant software:
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
4
Click
File
Import
, and select the scanner device.
5
Set the scan options.
6
Scan and save your scanned image.
- 208 -
Scanning using the WIA driver
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for scanning images.
WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows 7 and works with
digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan
and easily adjust images without using additional software:
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Click
Start
Control Panel
Devices and Printers
.
4
Right-click on device icon in
Printers and Faxes
Start Scan
.
5
New Scan
application appears.
6
Choose your scanning preferences and click
Preview
to see how your preferences will
affect the picture.
7
Scan and save your scanned image.
- 209 -
Networking
Network setup (Administrator only)
Useful network programs
Setting IP address
Installing driver over the network
IPv6 configuration
Wireless network setup (Dell B2375dfw only)
Using the WPS button (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
Setup using Windows (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off (Dell B2375dfw Mono
MFP only)
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
Troubleshooting for wireless network
AirPrint
Google Cloud Print™
- 210 -
Network setup (Administrator only)
NOTE: You can also use this feature from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, click Settings
Network Settings.
•Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
from the home screen.
Option Description
Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Selects the appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use
the network environment.
NOTE: There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are not
sure, leave as is, or consult the network administrator.
TCP/IP (IPv6) Selects this option to use the network environment through IPv6.
802.1x You can selects the user authentication for network
communication. For detailed information consult the network
administrator.
Ethernet Active You can set whether to use Ethernet on or off.
NOTE: Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Wi-Fi
Selects this option to use the wireless network.
Clear Settings Reverts the network settings to the default values.
NOTE: Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
- 211 -
Useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a network
environment. For the network administrator especially, managing several machines on the
network is possible.
NOTE: Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the following tasks.
• Check the supplies information and status.
• Customize machine settings.
• Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine status (toner
cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's email
automatically.
• Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various
network environments.
SetIP wired network setup
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP
addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
NOTE: TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
Printing a network configuration report
You can print
Network Configuration Report
from the machine’s control panel that will
show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network.
• The machine has the display screen: Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Reports
Network Settings
from the home screen.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC address and IP
address.
For example:
• MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address: 169.254.192.192
- 212 -
Printing Across a Network
Whether the printer is locally connected or network-connected, you need to install the
Dell
B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
software on each computer that prints
documents using the printer.
Setting IP address
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases
a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) server located on the network.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from
Control Panel
Security Center
Windows Firewall
.
1
Download the software from the
Dell
website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.dell.com find your product Support or Downloads).
2
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
3
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
4
Turn on the machine.
5
From the Windows Start menu, select
All Programs
Dell Printers
Dell
B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
SetIP
.
6
Click the icon in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
7
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In a corporate
intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager
before proceeding.
NOTE: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration
Report.
See "Printing a network configuration report". and enter it
without the
colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
8
Click
Apply
, and then click
OK
. The machine will automatically print the
Network
Configuration Report
. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
- 213 -
Installing driver over the network
Configuring Network Parameters on the Operator Panel
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
All Programs
Accessories
Run
.
X:\
Setup.exe
replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and
click
OK
.
– For Windows 8, If the installation window does not appear, from
Charms
, select
Search
Apps
and search for
Run
. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click
OK
. If
"Tap to choose what
happens with this disk"
pop-up window appears, click the window and select
Run
Setup.exe
.
Item Requirements
Network Interface
• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan
• 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN (
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
only
)
Network Operating
System
• Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista®,
Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows Server® 2008 R2
•Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 - 10.8
•UNIX OS
Network Protocols
•TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD, AirPrint,
Google Cloud Print
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
Wireless security
(
Dell B2375dfw Mono
MFP
only
)
• Authentication: Open System, Shared Key
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES
• WPA Security : WPA-Enterprise/ Personal,
WPA2-Enterprise/Personal
- 214 -
3
Select
Setup...
in
New Printer
area.
4
Select
Ethernet
.
- 215 -
5
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. Also, your
machine’s IP address should have been set.
Click
Next
.
6
The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use
and click
Next
.
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, turn off the firewall and
click Update. For Windows operating system, Start Control Panel and start
windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating system,
refer to its on-line guide.
7
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
•
Dell Printer Experience
app can only be used in the
Start
screen when V4 driver is
installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your
computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually download the V4
driver from Dell website, www.dell.com find your product Support or
downloads.
• You can download Dell Printer Experience app from the Windows Store. You need
have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
a
From
Charms
, select
Search
.
b
Click
Store
.
c
Search and click
Dell Printer Experience
.
d
Click
Install
.
- 216 -
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not installed. If you
want to use the V4 driver in the
Desktop
screen, you can download from the Dell
website, www.dell.com find your product Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Dell’s printer management tools, you need to install them using
the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. Also, your
machine’s IP address should have been set. See "Setting IP address".
2
From
Charms
, select
Settings
Change PC settings
Devices
.
3
Click
Add a device
.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
NOTE: You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s
control panel that will show the current machine’s host name.
5
The driver is automatically installed from the
Windows Update
.
If you selected
EtheTalk
.
IPv6 configuration
CAUTION: IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
NOTE: If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to
the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address.
From the control panel
1
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2
Turn on the machine.
3
Print a
Network Configuration Report
that will check IPv6 addresses. See "Printing a
network configuration report".
4
Select
Start
Control Panel
Printers and Faxes
.
5
Click
Add a printer
in the left pane of the
Printers and Faxes
windows.
6
Click
Add a local printer
in the
Add printer
windows.
7
The
Add Printer Wizard
window appears. Follow the instructions in the window.
NOTE: If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate
IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.
- 217 -
Activating IPv6
1
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
TCP/IP (IPv6)
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Select
On
and press .
4
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
5
Reinstall your printer driver.
Setting IPv6 addresses
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements.
•
Link-local Address
: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with FE80).
•
Stateless Address
: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router.
•
Stateful Address
: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
•
Manual Address
: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
DHCPv6 address configuration (Stateful)
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following options for
default dynamic host configuration.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
TCP/IP (IPv6)
2
Press
DHCPv6 Config
.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select Select what you want.
•
Always Use
: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•
Never Use
: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•
Router
: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
- 218 -
Wireless network setup (Dell B2375dfw only)
NOTE: Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless networking
may not be available depending on the model. (
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
only)
Getting started
Understanding your network type
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a
time.
Wireless network name and network key
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, a network
name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Key are created for the network. Ask
your network administrator about this information before proceeding with the machine
installation.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
Ad hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless computer
and wireless machine communicate directly.
- 219 -
Introducing wireless set up methods
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting
method from the below table.
NOTE: Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on
the model or country.
NOTE: If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the
troubleshooting chapter. See "Troubleshooting for wireless network"
Set up method Connecting method Description & Reference
From the machine’s
control panel
Using the WPS
(recommended)
•See "Using the WPS button (Dell
B2375dfw Mono MFP only)".
From the computer
Access point via USB
cable
(recommended)
• Windows user, See "Access point
via USB cable in Windows".
• Mac user, See "Access point via
USB cable in Mac".
Ad hoc via USB cable
• Windows user, See "Ad hoc via
USB cable in Windows".
• Mac user, See "Ad hoc via USB
cable in Mac".
- 220 -
Using the WPS button (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the (WPS)
button on the control panel without a computer.
•If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make
sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the WPS
button or entering the PIN from the computer to connect to the access point
(or wireless router) varies depending on the access point (or wireless router)
you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point (or wireless router)
you are using.
•When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings may
change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless security
settings. The option name may differ depending on the access point (or
wireless router) you are using.
• WPS button has two functions.
– Press and hold the (WPS) button on the control panel for more than 2 seconds,
then wait for up to two minutes until you press the WPS (PBC) button on the
access point (or wireless router).
– If you Press and hold the (WPS) button on the control panel for less than 2
seconds, below manus are shown.
•
Wi-Fi
: You can turn the
Wi-Fi
on/off.
•
Wi-Fi Direct
: You can turn the
Wi-Fi Direct
on/off.
•
WPS
(
Connect via PBC
) : Connect your machine to a wireless network using
the
PBC
method.
•
WPS
(
Connect via PIN
) : Connect your machine to a wireless network using
the
PIN
method.
Items to prepare
• Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
• Networked computer (PIN mode only)
Choosing your type
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network using the
(WPS) button on the control panel.
The
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
method allows you to connect your machine to a
wireless network by pressing both the (WPS) button on the control panel of your machine
and the (WPS) button on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or
wireless router) respectively.
- 221 -
The
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
method helps you connect your machine to a
wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).
Connecting in PBC mode
1
Press and hold the (WPS) button on the control panel for more than 2 seconds.
The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS (PBC) button
on the access point (or wireless router).
OR
Press
(WPS) button
(on the control panel)
Connect via PBC
(from the home
screen).
OR
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Wi-Fi
WPS
Connect via PBC
from the home screen.
2
Press the
WPS (PBC)
button on the access point (or wireless router).
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access
point (or wireless router).
b
When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS
LED light stays on.
Connecting in PIN mode
1
If you wnat to konw PIN number, printing network configuration report. See "Printing a
network configuration report"
2
Press
(WPS) button
(on the control panel) less than 2 seconds
Connect via PIN
(from the home screen).
OR
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Wi-Fi
WPS
Connect via PIN
from the home screen.
The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
3
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is
connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks fast for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-digit PIN.
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access
point (or wireless router).
b
When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS
LED light stays on.
- 222 -
Re-connecting to a network
When the wireless function is on, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to the
access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless connection settings and
address. If not successful after two minutes, the wireless connection will be stopped and
Wi-Fi setting is turned off.
NOTE: In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the
wireless network:
•The machine is turned off and on again.
•The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
• The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine tries connecting to the access
point (or wireless router).
Disconnecting from a network
There are two methods available to disconnect the wireless network.
a
Press
(WPS) button
(on the control panel) less than 2 seconds
Wi-Fi
Activate
(from the home screen)
Off
.
b
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
Activate
Off
from the home screen.
Using the menu button
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network
and the Network Password if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point
(or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment,
please ask the person who set up your network.
NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Installing driver over the network".
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Activate
On
and select
Wi-Fi Settings
from the home screen .
2
select the setup method you want.
•
Search List
(recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic. The machine
will display a list of available networks to choose. From after a network is chosen
then printer will prompt for the corresponding security key.
•
Custom
: In this mode, users can give or manually edit their own SSID , or choose
the security option in detail.
Using other menu buttons
•
Wi-Fi
: You can turn the
Wi-Fi
on/off.
•
Wi-Fi Direct
: You can turn the
Wi-Fi Direct
on/off.
•
WPS
:You can select Connecting method.
•
Wi-Fi Signal
: You can check the Wi-Fi status.
•
Wi-Fi Default
: Sets default.
- 223 -
Setup using Windows (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
Dell Printer Easy Wi-Fi Install
Before Using Dell Printer Easy Wi-Fi Install, please ensure that OS of your computer should
be Windows 7 and above.
• Items to prepare
– Access point
– Network-connected computer
– Software CD that was provided with your machine
1
Turn on your computer, access point and machine.
2
Connect your computer to the wireless network.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
All programs
Accessories
Run
.
X:\
Setup.exe
replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD/DVD drive and
click
OK
.
• For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from
Charms
, select
Search
Apps
and
search for
Run
. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter that represents your
CD/DVD drive and click
OK
.
If “
Tap to choose what happens with this disc.
” pop-up window appears, click the
window and select
Run Setup.exe
.
- 224 -
4
Click
New Printer
.
5
Choose
Wireless
.
- 225 -
6
The software searches for printers.
7
Set your printer name and click
Next
.
- 226 -
8
Setup installing printer software.
9
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If
you want to print a test page, click
Print a test page
.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 10.
10
Click Finish.
- 227 -
Access point via USB cable in Windows
• Items to prepare
– Access point
– Network-connected computer
– Software CD that was provided with your machine
– The machine installed with a wireless network interface
–USB cable
1
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
NOTE: If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the installation
procedure, click Cancel to close the window.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
All programs
Accessories
Run
.
X:\
Setup.exe
replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD/DVD drive and
click
OK
.
• For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from
Charms
, select
Search
Apps
and
search for
Run
. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter that represents your
CD/DVD drive and click
OK
.
If “
Tap to choose what happens with this disc.
” pop-up window appears, click the
window and select
Run Setup.exe
.
- 228 -
4
Select
New Printer
.
5
Choose
Wireless
.
- 229 -
6
Click
Next
.
7
The software searches the wireless network.
NOTE: If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is properly
connected between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions
on the window.
8
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name
(SSID) of the access point you are using and click
Next
.
NOTE: If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you
want to set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
–
Enter the wireless Network Name
: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
–
Operation Mode
: Select
Infrastructure
.
–
Authentication
: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be
used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can
access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print
server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally
called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on the access
point and each of its clients.
–
Encryption
: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES).
–
Network Key
: Enter the encryption network key value.
- 230 -
–
Confirm Network Key
: Confirm the encryption network key value.
–
WEP Key Index
: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key
Index.
NOTE: The wireless network security window appears when the access point
has security settings.
The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ
according to its security mode: WEP, or WPA.
–
WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter the WEP
security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized
access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet
exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
–
WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes
automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
9
The window shows the wireless network settings and checks if the settings are
correct. Click
Next
.
•
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the
window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment
method to DHCP.
•
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the
window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and
other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP
address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network
administrator to get the static IP address.
For example:
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- 231 -
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
10
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable
between the computer and machine. Click
Next
.
NOTE: If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps in
the window.
Click
Next
if you are finished with the computer’s wireless network settings.
If you set the computer’s wireless network on DHCP, it will take several minutes to
receive the IP address.
11
The
Wireless Network Setting Complete
window appears. To print from a Wi-Fi Direct
supported mobile device, set the Wi-Fi Direct Option.
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct Option:
– Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports this feature.
– Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Dell Printer Manager
–
Network Name(SSID)
: The default Network Name is the model name and the
maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-").
–
Network Key
is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
12
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If
you want to print a test page, click
Print a test page
.
13
Click
Finish
.
- 232 -
Ad hoc via USB cable in Windows
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to
your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by following the simple steps
below.
• Items to prepare
– Network-connected computer
– Software CD that was provided with your machine
– The machine installed with a wireless network interface
–USB cable
1
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
All programs
Accessories
Run
.
X:\
Setup.exe
replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD/DVD drive and
click
OK
.
4
Select
New Printer
.
- 233 -
5
Select
Wireless
.
6
The software searches the wireless network.
NOTE: If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable
is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the
instruction in the window.
7
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has
searched appears.
If you want to use the Dell default ad hoc setting, select the last wireless network on
the list,
Network Name(SSID)
is
Dell_device
and
Dell_Signal
is
Printer Self Network
.
Then, click
Next
.
If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list.
NOTE: If you want to change ad hoc settings click the Advanced Setting
button.
–
Enter the wireless Network Name
: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
–
Operation Mode
: Select ad hoc.
–
Channel
: Select the channel. (
Auto Setting
or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
–
Authentication
: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be
used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can
access the network.
- 234 -
–
Encryption
: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
–
Network Key
: Enter the encryption network key value.
–
Confirm Network Key
: Confirm the encryption network key value.
WEP Key Index
: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key
Index
.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security
setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select
Open System
or
Shared Key
for the authentication and click
Next
.
– WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized
access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet
exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
8
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and
click
Next
.
NOTE: Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address.
–
For the DHCP method
: If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the
Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. If it shows
Static, click
Change TCP/IP
to change the assignment method to
Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP)
.
–
For the Static method
: If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the
Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. If it shows
DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP
to enter the IP address and other network
configuration values for the machine.
For example:
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
- 235 -
9
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable
between the computer and machine. Click
Next
.
NOTE: If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps in
the window.
Click
Next
if you are finished with the computer’s wireless network settings.
If you set the computer’s wireless network on DHCP, it will take several minutes to
receive the IP address.
10
The
Wireless Network Setting Complete
window appears. To print from a Wi-Fi Direct
supported mobile device, set the Wi-Fi Direct Option.
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct Option:
– Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports this feature.
– Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Dell Printer Manager
–
Network Name(SSID)
: The default Network Name is the model name and the
maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-").
–
Network Key
is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
11
Click
Next
when the
Confirm Printer Connection
window appears.
12
Click
Finish
.
Using a network cable
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to work with your
network, you will need to perform some configuration procedures.
NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Wireless network setup (Dell
B2375dfw only)".
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless
network, for information about your network configuration.
• Items to prepare
– Access point
– Network-connected computer
– Software CD that was provided with your machine
– A machine installed with a wireless network interface
–Network cable
Printing a network configuration report
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration
report.
See
"Printing a network configuration report"
- 236 -
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine using its MAC
address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is the hardware serial number
of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report
.
See
"Setting IP address"
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network and
the Network Password if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or
wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please
ask the person who set up your network.
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off (Dell B2375dfw Mono
MFP only)
There are two methods available to disconnect the wireless network on your machine.
a
Press
(WPS) button
(on the control panel) less than 2 seconds
Wi-Fi
(from
the home screen)
Off
.
b
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
Activate
Off
from the home screen.
Also you can turn the
Wi-Fi
network on/off in the
Embedded Web Service
.
1
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your
machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
Click
Login
on the upper right of the Embedded Web Service website.
4
Type in the
ID
and
Password
then click
Login
.If it’s your first time Logging into
Embedded Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. We recommend
you to change the default password for security reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: admin
5
When the
Embedded Web Service
window opens, click
Settings
Network
Settings
.
6
Click
Wireless
Custom
.
You can also turn the
Wi-Fi
network on/off.
- 237 -
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the Wi-Fi Direct
certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure connection and better
throughput than ad hoc mode.
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network and a Wi-Fi
Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print documents both from
Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.
•You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the printer’s
Wi-Fi Direct.
•The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct networks
do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP services.
•The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.
From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)
After the driver installation is complete, Dell Printer Manager can be set and changes in the
Wi-Fi Direct can be made.
NOTE: Dell Printer Manager is Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
– Click
Start
Programs
or
All Programs
Dell Printers
Dell Printer
Manager
Device Settings
Network
.
•
Wi-Fi Direct On/Off
: Select
On
to enable.
•
Device Name
: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your printer on a wireless
network. By default, the device name is the model name.
•
IP Address
: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is used only for the
local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless network. We
recommend using the default local IP address (the default local IP address of the
printer for Wi-Fi Direct is 192.168.3.1 )
•
Group Owner
: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi Direct group’s
owner. The
Group Owner
acts similar to a wireless access point. We recommend
activating this option.
•
Network Password
: If your printer is a
Group Owner
, a
Network Password
is
required for other mobile devices to connect to your printer. You can configure a
Network Password yourself, or can remember the given
Network Password
that
is randomly generated by default.
- 238 -
From the machine (Machines with a display screen)
•Select
My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Direct
from the touch screen.
•
On/Off
: Select
On
to enable.
From the network-connected computer
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable and
configure Wi-Fi Direct from
Embedded Web Service
.
• When the
Embedded Web Service
window opens, click
Settings
Network Settings
Wireless
Wi-Fi Direct
Custom
.
• Enable or disable
Wi-Fi Direct
and set other options.
Setting up the mobile device
• After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the mobile
device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.
• After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing application
(For example: Dell Mobile printer) to print from your smartphone.
NOTE: If your mobile device does not support WPS, you need to enter the "Network
Password" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.
- 239 -
Troubleshooting for wireless network
Problems during setup or driver installation
Connecting Failure - Verify Wireless Network Name
• The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or entered.
Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try connecting again.
• Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
Connecting Failure - Verify Network Security Key
• Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your access
point and machine.
Connecting Failure - Verify Wireless Connection
• Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB cable and
your machine’s power.
Connecting Failure - Unplug Ethernet Cable
• Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired network
cable from your machine.
Verify USB Connection
• When you access point via USB cable, unpluged USB cable. Check the USB cable.
Veriy IP Address
• Your machine is not receiving a IP from AP. Check the configured security on your
access point and machine.
Verify Network Settings
• The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and
machine.
– For a DHCP network environment
The receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is configured
to DHCP.
– For a Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured to static
address.
For example,
- 240 -
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
• IP address: 169.254.133.42
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:
• IP address: 169.254.133.43
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
• Gateway: 169.254.133.1
Other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
NOTE: For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
• Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be turned on.
• Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from the machine
or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the signal.
• Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and computer.
Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication.
• Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the communication.
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it cannot
be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the communication.
Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the
machine again.
• Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can check the IP
address by printing the network configuration report.
• Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured security
(password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless router)
administrator.
• Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings
to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the
allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the
access point has been reset.
Register the product's MAC address when you confogure the DHCP server on the
access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address that is set
with the MAC address. You can identify the Mac address of your machine by printing a
network configuration repor. See
"Printing a network configuration report".
• Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the network in
the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user's information before
connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
• This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.
- 241 -
• When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista, you might
need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine.
• You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for Dell
wireless network machines.
• The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
• The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless router) and the
machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not separated
by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.
• The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the
wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave oven and
some Bluetooth devices.
• Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router) changes, you
must do the product's wireless network setup again.
• If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g.
• If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may notconnect to
your machine.
- 242 -
Mobile Printing
The
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
and
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
support printing from a
variety of mobile devices.
Android™ OS
•Download the
Dell Mobile Print
app for free from Google Play™. Easy to use and
navigate, the Dell Mobile Print app enables direct printing of photos, documents, web
content and more, to supported Dell Printers on a Wi-Fi or Ethernet network.
Apple® iOS
• These printers are compatible with
AirPrint™
. For details on
AirPrint
, refer to
AirPrint
.
• These printers are also compatible with
Mobile Print App for
Dell
by Thinxtream™,
available for free download from
iTunes®
.
Scan the QR codes for quick access to the relevant application store.
h vz
- 243 -
AirPrint
NOTE: Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box
your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch
running the latest version of iOS.
Setting up AirPrint
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint
feature.
You can enable the
AirPrint
feature by one of the following methods.
1
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your
machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
Click
Login
on the upper right of the Embedded Web Service website.
4
Type in the
ID
and
Password
then click
Login
.If it’s your first time Logging into
Embedded Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. We recommend
you to change the default password for security reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: admin
5
When the
Embedded Web Service
window opens, click
Settings
Network
Settings
.
6
Click
AirPrint
.
You can enable
AirPrint
.
Printing via AirPrint
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
1
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
2
Touch the action icon( ).
3
Select
your printer driver name
and option menu to set up.
4
Touch Print button.
Print
it out.
NOTE: Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print
summary, click the print center icon ( ) in multitasking area. You can click
cancel in the print center.
- 244 -
Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™
is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your smart
phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your Google account with
the printer, and you are ready to use the
Google Cloud Print™
service. You can print your
document or email with
Chrome OS
,
Chrome browser
, or a
Gmail™
/
Google Docs™
application on your mobile device, so you don’t need to install the printer driver on the
mobile device. Refer to the Google website (http://support.google.com/cloudprint) for
more information about Google Cloud Print™.
Registering your Google account to the printer
NOTE: Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
You should create your Google account in advance.
1
Open the Chrome browser.
2
Visit www.google.com.
3
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
4
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key or click
Go
.
5
Click
Login
in the upper right corner of the
Embedded Web Service
website.
6
Enter your printer’s name and description..
7
Click
Register
.
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
NOTE: If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will
not appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
8
Click
Finish printer registration
.
9
Click
Manage your printers
.
Now your printer is registered with
Google Cloud Print™
service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
- 245 -
Printing with Google Cloud Print™
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using. You
can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™ service.
NOTE: Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.
Printing from an application on mobile device
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from Android mobile
phone.
1
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
NOTE: If you do not have the application, download it from the application
store such as Android Market or App Store.
2
Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
3
Tap the option button of the document that you want to print.
4
Tap the send button.
5
Tap the Cloud Print button.
6
Set the printing options if you want.
7
Tap
Click here to Print
.
Printing from the Chrome browser
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
1
Run Chrome.
2
Open the document or email that you want to print.
3
Click the wrench icon in the browser’s top right corner.
4
Click
Print
. A new tab for printing appears.
5
Select
Print with Google Cloud Print
.
6
Click the
Print
button.
- 246 -
Faxing
Setting the Printer ID
Setting up the Fax System
Sending a Fax
Receiving a Fax
Automatic Dialing
Other Ways to Fax
Additional Features
- 247 -
Setting the Printer ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send.
The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be
printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Initial Setup
Machine ID & Fax Number
from the home screen.
2
Enter the
Fax
and
ID
field using the pop-up keyboard.
Setting up the Fax System
Changing the Fax Setup Options
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Default Setting
Fax Default
from the
home screen.
2
Select to find the status to enter the value for the option you have selected.
Available Fax Defaults Options
You can use the following setup options for configuring the fax system:
Option Description
Darkness You can select the default darkness value to fax your documents
(-5 ~ 5).
Quality You can select the default resolution setting to Standard, Fine, Super
Fine.
Original Type You can select the type of original you are faxing. This will give you a
better fax.
Original Size You can sets the image size.
Duplex This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can
select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of
the paper.
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
• 2->1 Side Long Edge:
Scans both sides of the originals and prints each
of them on a separate sheet.
• 2->1 Side Short Edge:
Scans both sides of the originals and prints each
one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the
printout is rotate 180°.
- 248 -
Testing Fax line connection
1
Press
My Settings
Maintenance
Fax Line Test
from the home screen.
2
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
The printer display the test result.
If the fax line connection test has failed, check the telephone line cord connection or
contact your telephone service provider.
NOTE: If test pass - you can start using the Fax functionality
If test fail - Need to direct them to the troubleshooting section for fax.
- 249 -
Sending a Fax
Adjusting the Document Darkness
Use the darkness setting to fax your documents lighter or darker.
1
Press
Fax
from the home screen.
2
Press the
Setting
() from the screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select
Darkness
.
4
Select the darkness level(-5 ~ 5) you want.
•
1
: works well with dark print.
•
2
: works well with standard typed or printed documents.
•
3
: works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Adjusting the Document Quality
Use the Quality setting to improve the output quality of the original or to scan photographs.
1
Press
Fax
from the home screen.
2
Press the
Setting
() from the screen.
3
Press the left/right arrows to select
Quality
.
4
Select the quality mode you want.
The document types recommended for the quality settings are described in the table below.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in Super Fine quality will transmit at the highest resolution
supported by the receiving device.
Mode Recommended for:
Standard Documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine
mode is enabled only if the remote printer also supports the
Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.
- 250 -
Sending a Fax
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Fax
from the home screen.
3
Press the
Direct Input
or
Address
( ) from the screen.
4
If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"
5
Enter the remote fax phone number using the pop-up keyboard.
6
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
7
When the document is loaded from the document glass, the display shows
Another
Page?
on the screen after the document is scanned into the memory. If you have
additional pages, remove the scanned page and load the next page from the glass and
select
Yes
. Repeat as necessary.
After all of the pages are scanned, select
No
when the display shows
Another Page?
8
it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.
NOTE: Press to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
- 251 -
Speed Dial Fax
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Speed Dial Fax
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Speed Dial Fax
from the screen.
3
Select to destination from speed dial list.
4
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
5
When the document is loaded from the document glass, the display shows
Another
Page?
on the screen after the document is scanned into the memory. If you have
additional pages, remove the scanned page and load the next page from the glass and
select
Yes
. Repeat as necessary.
After all of the pages are scanned, select
No
when the display shows
Another Page?
6
it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.
- 252 -
Group Dial Fax
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Group Dial Fax
from the home screen.
3
Select to destination from group dial list.
4
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
5
When the document is loaded from the document glass, the display shows
Another
Page?
on the screen after the document is scanned into the memory. If you have
additional pages, remove the scanned page and load the next page from the glass and
select
Yes
. Repeat as necessary.
After all of the pages are scanned, select
No
when the display shows
Another Page?
it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.
- 253 -
On Hook Fax
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
On Hook Fax
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
On Hook Fax
from the home screen.
3
If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"
4
Press
On Hook
( ) from the screen.
5
Enter the remote fax machine’s fax number using the popup keyboard.
6
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and
returns to Standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.
For a listing of error messages and their meanings, see "Clearing LCD Error Messages".
If you receive an error message, press to clear the message and try to send the document
again.
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax
transmission. For further details, see the
MSG Confirm
item in "Available Fax Defaults
Options".
- 254 -
Automatic Redialing
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the
machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on the country's factory
default setting.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see
"Available Fax Defaults Options".
Redialing fax number
When you want to redial the last fax number you have sent, you can use this feature.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Fax
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Fax
from the home screen.
3
Press
Redial
on control pannel or
Caller ID
from the screen. If you select the
Caller ID
,
ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.
4
Select the fax number you want.
5
If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"
6
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
7
it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.
- 255 -
Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the extension
telephone socket ( ) on the back of your printer.
When the memory is full, the printer can no longer receive any incoming fax. Secure free
memory to resume by canceling printing received faxes.
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing,
faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-, A4-, or Legal-sized
paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Paper". For details about setting the
paper type and size in the tray, see "Setting the Paper Type" and "Setting the Paper Size".
Receiving Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
When you receive a fax, the printer answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax.
To change the number of rings, see "Available Fax Defaults Options".
If you want to adjust the ringer volume, see "Setting the Sound/Volume (Administrator
only)".
Receiving Automatically in the Ans/Fax Mode
If you are using an answering machine in this mode, attach it to the extension telephone
socket ( ) on the back of your printer.
If your printer does not detect a fax tone, the answering machine will take the call. If your
printer detects a fax tone, it automatically initiates reception of the fax.
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and your answering machine is
switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your machine, your printer
may automatically go into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.
Receiving Manually Using an Extension Telephone
This features works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the
extension telephone socket ( ) on the back of your printer. You can receive a fax from
someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without having to go to the fax
machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the keys
*9*
(star
nine star) on the extension telephone.
- 256 -
The printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote printer,
try pressing
*9*
once again.
*9*
is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last asterisks are fixed,
but you can change the middle number to whatever you choose. The code should be one
digit. For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Defaults Options".
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode
“Distinctive Ring” is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number
someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns, available in
combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax machine can “learn” the ring
pattern you designate to be answered by the FAX machine. This ringing pattern may be
recognized and answered as a FAX call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to
the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the extension telephone
socket ( ) on the back of your printer. You can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring
Pattern Detection at any time.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring
Pattern Detection, you may need another telephone line at your location, dial your FAX
number from another line.
To set up the DRPD mode:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Fax Setup
DRPD Mode
from the home
screen.
2
Press
Next
( ) from the screen.
3
Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to place the call from
a fax machine.
4
When your printer begins to ring, do not answer the call. The printer requires several
rings to learn the pattern.
5
When the printer completes learning, the displays shows
Complete DRPD Setup
.
6
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
When the
DRPD
feature is set up, the
DRPD
option is available in the
Receive Mode
menu.
To receive faxes in the
DRPD
mode, you need to set the menu to
DRPD
; see "Available Fax
Defaults Options".
NOTE: DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect the
printer to another telephone line.
NOTE: After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the
printer answers with a fax tone. Then call a different number assigned to that same
line to ensure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering
machine plugged into the extension telephone socket ( ) on the back of the
printer.
- 257 -
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while performing other
tasks. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your
printer stores incoming faxes in the memory. As soon as you finish copying, printing, or
resupply the consumables, the printer automatically prints the fax.
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 400 frequently dialed numbers in one, two or three-digit speed dial
locations (1-400).
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing
1
Press
My Settings
Address Book
from the home screen.
2
Press
Add
() icon.
3
Press
New Individual
.
4
Enter the name, Email address and phone number in the each field with the pop up
keyboard. And thenPress the up/down arrows to select speed dial number.
5
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
6
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Sending a Fax using a Speed Number
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
- 258 -
2
Press
Fax
from the home screen.
3
Press the
Direct Input
from the screen.
4
If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"
5
Enter the remote fax speed dial number and holding when entering last number until
shows dial number.
ex) Speed dial number is “102”, enter the “10” and holding “2”.
6
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
7
When the document is loaded from the document glass, the display shows
Another
Page?
on the screen after the document is scanned into the memory. If you have
additional pages, remove the scanned page and load the next page from the glass and
select
Yes
. Repeat as necessary.
After all of the pages are scanned, select
No
when the display shows
Another Page?
8
it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.
NOTE: Press to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
- 259 -
Group
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group
of these destinations and set them under a one. This enables you to use a group setting to
send the same document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial
number.
Setting Group
1
Press
My Settings
Address Book
from the home screen.
2
Press
Add
() icon.
3
Press
New Group
.
4
Enter the group name then press the
Add
( ) icon from the screen.
5
Select the speed you want at list.
6
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
7
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Editing Group
You can delete a specific member from a selected group or add a new number to the
selected group.
1
Press
My Settings
Address Book
from the home screen..
2
Select group you want.
3
You can edit
Group Name
and add or delete member.
4
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 260 -
Other Ways to Fax
Sending a fax in the computer
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.
To send a fax from your computer, the
Network PC Fax
program must be installed. This
program will be installed when you installed the printer driver.
1
Open the document to be sent.
2
Select
Print
from the
File
menu.
The
Print
window will be displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your
application.
3
Select
Dell Network PC Fax
from the Print window
4
Click
Print
or
OK
.
5
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option
NOTE: Select the Help menu from the window and click on any option you
want to know about.
6
Click Send.
Sending a Delayed Fax
You can set your printer to store and then send a fax at a later time.
NOTE: You can also using this function in Speed Dial Fax and Group Dial Fax.
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2
Press
Fax
from the home screen.
OR
Press
All Applicatons
()
Fax
from the home screen.
3
Press the
Setting
() from the screen.
4
Press the left/right arrows to select
Sending Type
Delay Send
.
5
Press the up/down arrows to set the
Start Time
.
6
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
7
If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"
8
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
9
Press the
Direct Input
or
Address
( ) from the screen.
- 261 -
10
Press
Start
( ) from the screen.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display asks if you want to
send another page. Select
Yes
to add more documents or
No
to begin sending the fax
immediately.
Fax Forward to Email addresses
You can set the printer to forward all outgoing or incoming faxes to the Email addresses.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Fax Setup
Send Forward
or
Receive
Forward
from the home screen.
2
Select
On
in the
Configuration
.
3
Select
Forward to Email
.
4
Press the
Direct Input
or
Address
( ) from the screen and input you want.
5
Select the option you want at
Attachment Type
() or
From Address
() .
6
Press
Check
( ) from the screen.
7
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Additional Features
Toll Save Mode (Administrator only)
The
Toll Save
mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified
time in order to take advantage of lower long distance rates.
To turn the
Toll Save
mode on:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Fax Setup
Toll Save
from the home
screen.
2
Press the left/right arrows to display
On
.
3
Select the
Start Date
and
End Date
each using the up/down arrows.
4
Enter the date and time each using the up/down arrows.
5
Select the
Start Time
and
End Time
each using the up/down arrows.
Date= “dd/mm/yyyy”
Day= 01 ~ 31
Month= 01 ~ 12
Year= 2000 ~ 2036
Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
NOTE: You can sets the clock mode, See "Setting the Clock Mode
(Administrator only)".
6
Press the
Check
( ) to complete.
- 262 -
Once Toll Save mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into
its memory and sends them at the programmed time.
To turn Toll Save mode off, follow steps 1 in "Toll Save Mode (Administrator only)" and then
press the left/right arrows until
Off
displays.
Using the Secure Receiving Mode (Administrator only)
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people.
You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out
received faxes when the printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes
may go into memory. When the mode turns off, any faxes stored may be printed.
NOTE: If the display shows a Memory Full message, your machine cannot receive
fax. Delete any documents you no longer need from the memory.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Fax Setup
Secure Receive
from the
home screen.
2
Select
On
in the
Configuration
.
3
Enter a four-digit passcode you want to use, using the keyboard.
4
Re-enter the passcode again and press
Check
() from the screen.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory
and displays
Secure Receive
to let you know that there is a fax stored.
To print received documents:
1
Press
Job Status( ) button
from the panel.
2
Select
My Settings
Machine Setup
Job management
Secure Receive Print
from the screen.
3
Enter the four-digit passcode and Press
Start
() from the screen.
The faxes stored in the memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
Fax Setup
Secure Receive
from the
home screen.
2
Select
Off
in the
Configuration
.
3
Enter the four-digit passcode and press
OK
.
The mode is deactivated and the printer prints all of the faxes which have been stored
in memory.
4
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 263 -
Using Advanced Fax Settings
Your printer has various user-selectable setting options for sending or receiving faxes. These
options are preset at the factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details about printing the list, see
"Reports".
Changing Setting Options
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Select
Fax Setup
.
3
Select fax setting option you want.
4
When the option that you want displays, choose the desired status by pressing the
left/right arrows.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Advanced Fax Setting Options
Option Description
Send Forward You can set the printer to always forward all of the outgoing faxes
to the specified destination besides the fax numbers you entered.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the number of the
remote fax machine to which the faxes are forwarded. You can
foward to Fax(1), Email(20), Network folder or FTP(20). Number in
the “()” is available to regist numers.
Receive Forward You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax
number during a specified time period. When a fax arrives at your
printer, it is stored in the memory. Then, the printer dials the fax
number that you have specified and sends the fax.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the fax number to
which the faxes are forwarded and the start time and the end time.
Also, you can forward incoming faxes up to 25 fax numbers. You
can foward to Fax(1), Email(20), SMB(20), PC(1). Number in the “()”
is available to regist numers.
Toll Save You can set your printer to store your faxes in memory and to send
them at the specified toll-saving time. For details about sending
toll save faxes, see "Toll Save Mode (Administrator only)".
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the start time and
date; and the end time and date for toll save mode.
- 264 -
Junk Fax Setup Using the Junk Fax Setup feature, the system will not accept faxes
sent from remote stations. Their numbers are stored in the
memory as junk fax numbers. This feature is useful for blocking
any unwanted faxes.
Select Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.
Select On to turn the feature on. You can set up to 10 fax numbers
as junk fax numbers. After storing the numbers, you do not receive
any faxes from the registered stations.
Secure Receive You can keep your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people.
For further details about setting this mode, see "Using the Secure
Receiving Mode (Administrator only)".
Prefix Dial You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number
dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for
accessing the PABX exchange.
Stamp Received
Name
This option allows the printer to automatically print the page
number, and the date and time of the reception at the bottom of
each page of a received document.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select
On
to turn this feature on.
ECM Mode The Error Correction Mode helps with poor line quality and
ensures that faxes are sent smoothly to any other ECM-equipped
fax machine. If the line quality is poor, it takes more time to send a
fax when you are using the ECM mode.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on.
Modem Speed Select the maximum modem speed you want if the phone line fails
to sustain a higher modem speed. You can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4,
12.0, 9.6, or 4.8 kbps.
Ring to Answer Specifies the number of times the machine rings before answering
an incoming call.
Receive Mode Selects the default fax receiving mode.
Redial Delay Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.
Redial Attempt Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the machine will
not redial.
MSG Confirm Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission was
successfully completed or not.
Option Description
- 265 -
Using an Answering machine
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as
shown in Figure 1.
Set your printer to
Ans/Fax
mode and set the
Ring to Answer
to a digit greater than the
Rings to Answer setting for the TAD.
Auto Report A report with detailed information about the previous 50
communications operations, including time and dates. The
available options are On or Off.
Auto Reduction Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the size of the
paper loaded in the machine.
Discard Size Discards a specific length from the end of the received fax.
Recieve Code Initiates fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the
EXT socket on the back of the machine. If you pick up the
extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to
*9* at the factory.
DRPD Mode Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. You can set the machine to
recognize different ring patterns for each number. This setting may
not be available depending on your country
Tray You can select the tray to printing the receive fax.
Print Duplex You can set the machine to print received faxes on both sides of
paper. The available options are Off, Long Edge, and Short Edge.
Fax Setup Wizard Frequently used functions are gathered for users to set fax settings
easily.
Option Description
LINE EXT
Figure 1
Line
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
Telephone Answering Device
Line Phone
- 266 -
• When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are
received and then starts receiving the fax.
• If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into Fax mode after a
predefined number of rings.
• If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call if you
access
Fax
On Hook Dial
and press
Start
( ) and then hang up the receiver, or
press the remote receive code *9* and hang up the receiver.
Using a Computer Modem
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet connection,
connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown
here in Figure 2.
• Set your printer to
Ans/Fax
mode and set the
Ring to Answer
to a digit greater than
the rings to answer setting for the TAD.
• Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.
• Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.
• To fax via the computer modem, follow the instructions provided with your computer
modem and fax application.
• You can capture images using your printer and Dell ScanDirect and send them using
your fax application with the computer modem.
→
LINE EXT
Figure 2
Line Telephone Answering Device
Line Phone
Computer
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP / Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
- 267 -
Mac
Installing Software for Mac
Printing
Scanning
Wireless network setup
- 268 -
Your printer supports Mac systems with a built-in USB interface or network interface card.
When you print a file from a Mac computer, you can use the PostScript driver by installing
the PPD file.
Installing Software for Mac
The Drivers and Documentation CD that came with your printer provides you with the PPD
file that allows you to use the PostScript driver, for printing on a Mac computer.
Verify the following before you install the printer software:
Install the printer driver
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click
CD-ROM icon that appears
on your Mac desktop.
•
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the
MAC_Installer
Installer OS X
icon.
5
Click
Continue
.
6
Read the license agreement and click
Continue
.
7
Click Agree to
Agree
to the license agreement.
8
Click
Install
All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
•
If you click
Customize
you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click
OK
.
10
Select
USB Connected Printer
on the
Printer Connection Type
and click
Continue
.
11
Click
Add Printer
button to select your printer and add it to your printer list.
•
If your machine supports fax, click
Add Fax
button to select your fax and add it
to your fax list
12
After the installation is finished, click
Close
.
Operating System Requirements
CPU RAM Free Disk Space
Mac OS X 10.5
• 867MHz or faster
Power PC G4/G5
• Intel processors
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.6
• Intel processors
1 GB (2GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.7 - 10.8
• Intel processors
1 GB (2GB) 1 GB
- 269 -
ReInstallation the printer driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
Open the
Applications
folder
Dell
Printer Software Uninstaller
.
2
To uninstall printer software, click
Continue
.
3
Check the program you want to delete and click
Uninstall
.
4
Enter the password and click
OK
.
5
After the uninstallation is finished, click
Close
.
NOTE: If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup
Utility or Print & Fax.
Installing driver over the network
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click
CD-ROM icon that appears
on your Mac desktop.
•
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
4
Double-click the
MAC_Installer
Installer OS X
icon.
5
Click
Continue
.
6
Read the license agreement and click
Continue
.
7
Click Agree to
Agree
to the license agreement.
8
Click
Install
All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
•
If you click
Customize
you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click
OK
.
10
Select
Network Connected Printer (Wired or Wireless)
on the
Printer Connection
Type
and click
Continue
.
11
Click
Add Printer
button to select your printer and add it to your printer list.
12
Click
IP
and select
HP Jetdirect - Socket
in
Protocol
.
13
Enter the machine’s IP address in the
Address
input field.
14
Enter the queue name in the
Queue
input field. If you cannot determine the queue
name for your machine server, try using the default queue first.
15
If Auto Select does not work properly, choose
Select Printer Software
and your
machine name in
Print Using
.
16
Click
Add
.
17
After the installation is finished, click
Close
.
- 270 -
Printing
Printing a Document
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer software setting in each
application you use. Follow these steps to print from a Mac.
1
Open the document to print.
2
Open the
File
menu and click
Page Setup
(
Document Setup
in some applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other options and click
OK
.
4
Open the
File
menu and click
Print
.
5
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
6
Click
Print
.
Changing Printer Settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your printer.
From your Mac application, select
Print
from the
File
menu.
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a
cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1
Open an application, and select
Print
from the
File
menu.
2
Select
Layout
from the drop-down list under
Orientation
. In the
Pages per Sheet
drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.
3
Select the other options to use.
4
Click
Print
. The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of
paper.
Printing on Both Sides of the Paper
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished
document. The binding options are, as follows:
Long-Edge Binding
: This option is the conventional layout used in book binding.
Short-Edge Binding
: This option is the type often used with calendars.
CAUTION: If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy
might print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper when
you are printing more than 1 copy.
1
From your Mac application, select
Print
from the
File
menu.
2
Select the
Layout
from the drop-down list under
Orientation
.
- 271 -
3
Select a binding orientation from
Two Sided
option.
4
Select the other options to use.
5
Click
Print
and the printer prints on both sides of the paper.
Using help
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on the topic you
want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information about that option's
feature, which is provided from the driver.
- 272 -
Scanning
You can scan documents using
Image Capture
. Mac OS offers
Image Capture
.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
3
Start
Applications
and click
Image Capture
.
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect
the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists, please refer to the
Image Capture
’s help.
4
Select the option you want.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE: If scanning does not operate in
Image Capture
, update Mac OS to the
latest version.
Wireless network setup
Access point via USB cable in Mac
Items to prepare
– Access point
– Network-connected computer
– Software CD that was provided with your machine
– The machine installed with a wireless network interface
–USB cable
1
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
4
Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
• For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Finder.
5
Double-click the
MAC_Installer
folder
Installer OS X
icon.
- 273 -
6
Click
Continue
.
7
Read the license agreement and click
Continue
.
8
Click
Agree
to agree to the license agreement.
9
Click
Install
. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
If you click
Customize
, you can choose individual components to install.
10
Enter the password and click
OK
.
11
Select
Configuration of Wireless network
on the
Printer Connection Type
and click
Continue.
12
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name
(SSID) of the access point you are using and click
Next
.
NOTE: When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced
Setting.
–
Enter the wireless Network Name
: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
–
Operation Mode
: Select
Infrastructure
.
–
Authentication
: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be
used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can
access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print
server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally
called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on the access
point and each of its clients.
–
Encryption
: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES).
–
Network Password
: Enter the encryption Network Password value.
–
Confirm Network Password
: Confirm the encryption Network Password value.
–
WEP Key Index
: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key
Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security
enabled.
– Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Dell Printer Manager. See
"Using the Dell
Printer Manager"
–
Network Name(SSID)
: The default Network Name is the model name and the
maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-").
–
Network Password
is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
13
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable
between the computer and machine.
14
Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished, click
Quit
.
- 274 -
NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Installing Software for Mac"
Ad hoc via USB cable in Mac
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to
your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by following these simple
directions.
Items to prepare
– Network-connected computer
– Software CD that was provided with your machine
– A machine installed with a wireless network interface
–USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3
Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
• For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Finder.
4
Double-click the
MAC_Installer
folder
Installer OS X
icon.
5
Click
Continue
.
6
Read the license agreement and click
Continue
.
7
Click
Agree
to agree to the license agreement.
8
Click
Install
. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
If you click
Customize
, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click
OK
.
10
Select
Configuration of Wireless network
on the
Printer Connection Type
and click
Continue.
11
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has
searched appears. Click the
Advanced Settings
button.
NOTE:
–
Enter the wireless Network Name
: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
–
Operation Mode
: Select ad hoc.
–
Channel
: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
–
Authentication
: Select an authentication type.
- 275 -
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be
used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can
access the network.
–
Encryption
: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
–
Network Password
: Enter the encryption Network Password value.
–
Confirm Network Password
: Confirm the encryption Network Password value.
–
WEP Key Index
: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key
Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security
setting.
Select
Open System
or Shared Key for the authentication and click
Next
.
– WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized
access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet
exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
12
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the settings and
click
Next
.
NOTE: Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address.
•
For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the
Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click Change
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically
(DHCP).
•
For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the
Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the
machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
- 276 -
Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
13
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is confirmed
appears, disconnect the network cable and click
Next
.
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the machine when
configuring the wireless network.
14
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
15
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit
.
NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Install the printer driver"
- 277 -
Linux
Getting Started
Installing the MFP Driver
Installing driver over the network
Printing a Document
Printing Files
Scanning a Document
- 278 -
Getting Started
The supplied Drivers and Documentation CD provides you with Dell's MFP driver package
for using your printer with a Linux computer.
Dell's MFP driver package contains printer and scanner drivers, providing the ability to print
documents and scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications for
configuring your printer and further processing of the scanned documents.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver package enables you to monitor
a number of MFP devices via USB port.
The MFP driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program. You do
not need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the MFP
software: all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically;
this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones.
Installing the MFP Driver
System Requirements
Supported OS
• RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5, 6 (32/ 64 bit)
• Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 (32/ 64 bit)
• SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/ 64 bit)
• OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 (32/ 64 bit)
• Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)
• Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04, 10.10, 11.04 (32/ 64 bit)
• SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
• Debian 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 (32/ 64 bit)
Recommended Hardware Requirements
• Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
• 512 MB (1 GB)
• 1 GB (2 GB)
Installing the MFP Driver
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
When the
Administrator Login
window appears, type “root” in the
Login
field and
enter the system password.
- 279 -
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
From the Dell website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.
4
Right-click the
Unified Linux Driver
package and extract the package.
5
Double click
cdroot
autorun
.
6
When the welcome screen appears, click
Next
.
7
When the installation is complete, click
Finish
.
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the
Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties,
consult the on-screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver
package Windows applications, such as
Unified Driver Configurator
or
Image Manager
.
Reinstalling the MFP Driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
When the
Administrator Login
window appears, type “root” in the
Login
field and
enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the
printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
Open the Terminal program. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following.
• [root@localhost root]#cd /opt/DELL/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
4
Click
Next
.
5
Click
Finish
.
- 280 -
Installing driver over the network
You need to download Linux software packages from the Dell website to install the printer
software (http://www.dell.com find your product Support or Downloads).
Install the Linux driver and add network printer
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your
machine’s IP address should have been set.
2
Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Dell website.
3
Extract the Unified Linux Driver package and open the new directory.
4
Double-click the
cdroot
autorun
.
5
The Dell installer window opens. Click
Next
.
6
The add printer wizard window opens. Click
Next
.
7
Select network printer and click
Search
button.
8
The machine’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
9
Select your machine and click
Next
.
10
Input the printer description and
Next
.
11
After the machine is added, click
Finish
.
12
When installation is done, click
Finish
.
Add a network printer
1
Double-click the
Unified Driver Configurator
.
2
Click
Add Printer
.
3
The
Add printer wizard
window opens. Click
Next
.
4
Select
Network printer
and click the
Search
button.
5
The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
6
Select your machine and click
Next
.
7
Enter the printer description and click
Next
.
8
After the machine is added, click
Finish
.
- 281 -
Using the Unified Driver Configurator
The
Unified Driver Configurator
is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. You
need to install Unified Linux Driver to use
Unified Driver Configurator
,
see "Installing the MFP
Driver".
After installing the MFP driver, the
Unified Driver Configurator
icon will automatically be
created on your desktop.
Opening Unified Driver Configurator
1
Double-click
Unified Driver Configurator
on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select
DELL Unified Driver
and then
DELL Unified Driver Configurator
.
2
Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window.
You can use the onscreen help by clicking
Help
.
3
After changing the configurations, click
Exit
to close the
Unified Driver Configurator
.
Printers Configuration button
Scanners Configuration button
MFP Ports Configuration button
- 282 -
Printers Configuration
Printers configuration
has the two tabs;
Printers
and
Classes
.
Printers Tab
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button
on the left side of the
Unified Driver Configurator
window.
You can use the following printer control buttons:
•
Refresh
: Renews the available printers list.
•
Add Printer
: Allows you to add a new printer.
•
Remove Printer
: Removes the selected printer.
•
Set as Default
: Sets the current printer as a default printer.
•
Stop/Start
: Stops/starts the machine.
•
Test
: Allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly.
•
Properties
: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. For details, see
"Printing a Document".
Shows all of the
installed printer.
Switches to Printer
configuration.
Shows the status, model
name and URI of your
printer.
- 283 -
Classes Tab
The
Classes
tab shows a list of available printer classes.
•
Refresh
: Renews the classes list.
•
Add Class...
: Allows you to add a new printer class.
•
Remove Class
: Removes the selected printer class.
Shows the status of the
class and the number of
printers in the class.
Shows all of the printer
classes.
- 284 -
MFP Ports Configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available MFP ports, check the status of each port
and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason.
•
Refresh
: Renews the available ports list.
•
Release port
:
Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your printer may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port. Since
the MFP device contains more than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Dell MFP driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used
by Dell printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called MFP ports.
The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the MFP Ports Configuration. The port
sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device, while another
block is in use.
When you install a new MFP printer onto your system, it is strongly recommended you do
this with the assistance of an
Unified Driver Configurator
. In this case you will be asked to
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration
for MFP’s functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.
Switches to MPF ports
configuration.
Shows the port type,
device connected to the
port and status.
Shows all of the
available ports.
- 285 -
Printing a Document
Printing from Applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application.
1
Open the document to print.
2
Open the
File
menu and click
Page Setup
(
Print Setup
for some applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, and make sure that your machine is selected.
Click
Apply
.
4
Open the
File
menu and click
File
.
5
Select your machine to print.
6
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
7
Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.
8
Click
Print
.
Printing Files
You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard CUPS directly from
the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows
you to do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
"
lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>
"
Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details.
- 286 -
Configuring Printer Properties
Using the
Printer Properties
window provided by the
Printers configuration
, you can
change the various properties for your machine as a printer.
1
Open the
Unified Driver Configurator
.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2
Select your printer on the available printers list and click
Properties
.
3
The
Printer Properties
window opens.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
•
General
: allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered
in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration.
•
Connection
: allows you to view or select another port. If you change the printer
port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the
printer port in this tab.
•
Driver
: allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking
Options
,
you can set the default device options.
•
Jobs
: shows the list of print jobs. Click
Cancel Job
to cancel the selected job and
select the
Show completed jobs
check box to see previous jobs on the job list.
•
Classes
: shows the class that your printer is in. Click
Add to Class
to add your
printer to a specific class or click
Remove from Class
to remove the printer from
the selected class.
4
Click
OK
to apply the changes and close the
Printer Properties
Window.
- 287 -
Scanning a Document
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2
Double-click the
Unified Driver Configurator
on your desktop.
3
Click the button to switch to
Scanners Configuration
.
4
Select the scanner on the list.
5
Click
Properties
.
6
Load the document to be scanned face up into the DADF or face down on the
document glass.
7
From the
Scanner Properties
window, click
Preview
.
Click your scanner.
- 288 -
8
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane
.
9
Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the
Preview Pane
.
10
Select the option you want.
11
Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE: For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type
drop-down list.
Drag the pointer to set the
image area to be scanned.
- 289 -
Editing an image with Image Manager
The
Image Manager
window provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your
scanned image.
Use these tools to edit
the image.
- 290 -
Unix
Installing driver over the network
Uninstalling the printer driver
Setting up the printer
Printing a Document
Changing the machine settings
- 291 -
NOTE: The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not type
“”.
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver package first, then
setup the printer.
Installing driver over the network
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver package first, then
setup the printer.
System Requirements
Supported OS
• Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC)
• HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
• IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 7.1 (PowerPC)
Free HDD space
1 GB (2 GB)
Install the Unix driver and add network printer
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
1
From the Dell website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer Driver package to your
computer.
2
Acquire root privileges.
“
su -
”
3
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
4
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.
“
gzip -d
< enter the package name
| tar xf -
”
5
Go to the unpacked directory.
6
Run the install script.
“
./install –i
”
install
is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer
Driver package.
Use “
chmod 755 install
” command to give the permission to the installer script.
7
Execute the “
. /install –c
” command to verify installation results.
- 292 -
8
Run “
installprinter
” from the command line. This will bring up the
Add Printer Wizard
window. Setup the printer in this window referring to the following procedures.
• On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be enabled
and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two commands on the root
terminal:
“
accept <printer_name>
”
“
enable <printer_name>
”
Uninstalling the printer driver
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
a
Run “
uninstallprinter
” command from the terminal. It will open the
Uninstall
Printer Wizard
. The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
b
Select the printer to be deleted.
c
Click
Delete
to delete the printer from the system.
d
Execute the “
. /install –d
” command to uninstall the whole package.
e
To verify removal results, execute the “
. /install –c
” command.
To re-install it, use the command “
. /install -i
” to reinstall the binaries.
Setting up the printer
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command line. This will
bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window according to the
following steps:
1
Type the name of the printer.
2
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
3
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
Type
field. This is
optional.
4
Specify any printer description in the
Description
field. This is optional.
5
Specify the printer location in the
Location
field.
6
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the
Device
textbox for
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with
jetdirect Queue type
, only the DNS
name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
7
Queue type
shows the connection as
lpd
or
jetdirect
in the corresponding list box.
Additionally,
usb
type is available on Sun Solaris OS.
8
Select
Copies
to set the number of copies.
- 293 -
9
Check the
Collate
option to receive copies already sorted.
10
Check the
Reverse Order
option to receive copies in the reverse order.
11
Check the
Make Default
option to set this printer as default.
12
Click
OK
to add the printer.
13
Select the option you want.
14
Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE: For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job
Type drop-down list.
Printing a Document
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, PS files to print.
1
Execute “
printui <file_name_to_print>
” command.
For example, if you are printing “
document1
”
printui
document1
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver
Print Job Manager
in which the user can select
various print options.
2
Select a printer that has been already added.
3
Select the printing options from the window such as
Page Selection
.
4
Select how many copies are needed in
Number of Copies
.
NOTE: To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
press Properties.
5
Press
OK
to start the print job.
Changing the machine settings
The UNIX printer driver
Print Job Manager
in which the user can select various print options
in printer
Properties
.
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for
Help
, “O” for
OK
, “A” for
Apply
, and “C” for
Cancel
.
General tab
•
Paper Size
: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according to your
requirements.
- 294 -
•
Paper Type
: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box are
Printer
Default
,
Plain
, and
Thick
.
•
Paper Source
: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is
Auto Selection
.
•
Orientation
: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
•
Duplex
: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.
NOTE: Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications
for odd-even printing.
•
Multiple pages
: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
•
Page Border
: Choose any of the border styles (e.g.,
Single-line hairline
,
Double-line
hairline
)
Image tab
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your document.
Text tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
Margins tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
•
Use Margins
: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not enabled.
The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective
fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size selected.
•
Unit
: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
Printer-Specific Settings tab
Select various options in the
JCL
and
General
frames to customize various settings. These
options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
- 295 -
Maintenance
Clearing the printer NVRAM
Backing up Data
Cleaning Your Printer
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge
Replacement Parts
Ordering Supplies
- 296 -
Clearing the printer NVRAM
CAUTION: Before clearing the memory, make sure that all fax jobs have been
completed, or you will lose those jobs.
You can selectively clear information stored in your printer’s memory.
1
Press
My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.
2
Scroll to select
Restore Options
.
3
Scroll until you see the option you want to clear.
•
Printer Setup
: Clears all of the data stored in the memory and resets all of your
settings to the factory default.
•
Paper Setup
: Restores all of the Paper Setting options to the factory default.
•
Tray Behavior
: Restores all of the Tray Behavior options to the factory default.
•
Copy Default
: Restores all of the copy options to the factory default.
•
Fax Default
: Restores all of the Fax Setup options to the factory default.
•
Email & Fax Default
: Restores all of the Email & Fax options to the factory default.
•
Access Google Drive Default
: Restores all of the Google Drive options to the
factory default.
•
My Calendar Default
: Restores all of the My Calendar options to the factory
default.
•
Scan to SharePoint Online Default
: Restores all of the Scan to SharePoint Online
options to the factory default.
•
My Forms Default
: Restores all of the My Forms options to the factory default.
•
My Files Default
: Restores all of the My Files options to the factory default.
•
Out-going Fax Report
: Clears all records of your Out-going Fax Report.
•
In-coming Fax Report
: Clears all records of your In-coming Fax Report .
•
Email Sent Reports
: Clears all records of your sent Email.
4
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
The selected memory is cleared.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 297 -
Backing up Data
Date in the printer's memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage
failure. Backup helps you protect your Email/Fax List entries and the system settings by
storing them as backup files on a USB memory key.
NOTE: In case of the phonebook, you can save the phonebook in csv file format. So
that you can confirm or modify the phone list in your computer.
Backing up Data
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
2
Press
Export
.
3
Press the option you want to back up.
Select option : Address Book, Setup Data.
4
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
Then
OK
, the data is backed up to the USB memory key.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
Restoring Data
1
Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
2
Press
Import
.
3
Press the option you want to restore.
4
Press
Start
( ) on the screen.
Then
OK
, the data is restoring to the machine.
5
Press the home icon ( ) to return to Home Screen.
- 298 -
Cleaning Your Printer
To maintain the print quality, follow the cleaning procedures below, each time the toner
cartridge is replaced or if print quality problems occur.
NOTE: Do not touch the transfer roller located under the toner cartridge when
cleaning inside the printer. Oil from your fingers may cause print quality problems.
CAUTION: Cleaning solvents that contain alcohol or other strong substances may
discolor or crack the printer cabinet.
Cleaning the Exterior
Clean the printer cabinet with a soft, damp, lint-free cloth. Do not let water drip onto the
printer or inside the printer.
Cleaning the Interior
Paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and cause print quality
problems, such as smearing or toner specks. Clean inside the printer to prevent these
problems.
1
Power the printer off and unplug the power cord. Allow a reasonable amount of time
for the printer to cool down.
2
Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge straight out. Set it on a clean flat
surface.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for
more than a few minutes.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
- 299 -
3
With a dry and lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner
cartridge area and the toner cartridge cavity.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller inside the printer. Oil from your
fingers may cause print quality problems.
4
Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover.
5
Plug in the power cord and power the printer on.
- 300 -
Cleaning the scanner
Keeping the scanner and DADF glass clean ensure the highest quality copies, scans, and
sent faxes. Dell recommends cleaning the scanner at the start of each day and during the
day, as needed.
NOTE: If there are lines present on copied or faxed documents, check your scanner
and DADF glass for any particles.
1
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2
Open the document cover.
3
Wipe the surface of the document glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry.
NOTE: Documents are moved across the DADF glass. As a result, the DADF
glass may need special attention to remove built-up residue.
4
Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white bar until it is clean and dry.
5
Close the document cover.
X
Z
Y
[
1 white bar
2 document cover
3 DADF glass
4 document glass
- 301 -
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge
Storing the Toner Cartridge
Store the toner cartridge in the original packaging until you are ready to install it.
Do not store the toner cartridge in:
• Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F)
• An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature
• Direct sunlight
•Dusty places
• A car for a long period of time
• An environment where corrosive gases are present
• An environment with salty air
Redistributing Toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks or light print occurs. The
toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display. Thoroughly
shake the cartridge from side-to-side 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the
cartridge and temporarily improve print quality.
This is not intended to be a long term method of correction, but meant to assist your
printing needs until you obtain a new cartridge assembly.
1
Open the front cover.
- 302 -
2
Pull the toner cartridge out.
3
Thoroughly shake the cartridge from side-to-side 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
NOTE: If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wipe the toner off with
a dry cloth and wash your clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge.
Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
4
Holding the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the
opening in the printer.
5
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the printer will
guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.
6
Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is surely closed.
- 303 -
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When the toner eventually runs out, only blank pages print when a print job or copy job are
sent. The toner-related message saying that the toner is empty may appear on the display.
In that case the incoming faxes are only saved in the memory and not printed. At this stage,
the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.
Order an extra toner cartridge so you will have it on hand when the current cartridge no
longer prints satisfactorily. See "Ordering Supplies" to order toner cartridges.
CAUTION: For best results, use Dell toner cartridge. Print quality and printer
reliability are not guaranteed if you do not use Dell supplies.
To replace the toner cartridge:
1
Open the front cover.
2
Pull the toner cartridge out.
3
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
4
Remove the packing tape and thoroughly shake the cartridge from side-to-side to
distribute the toner.
Save the box and the cover for shipping.
NOTE: If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wipe the toner off with
a dry cloth and wash your clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.
- 304 -
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge.
Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
5
Holding the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the
opening in the printer.
6
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the printer will
guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.
7
Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is surely closed.
Cleaning the Drum
If there are streaks or spots on your print, the Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) drum of the
toner cartridge may require cleaning.
1
Before setting the cleaning procedure, ensure that paper is loaded in the paper tray.
2
Press
My Settings
from the home screen.
3
Press
Maintenance
Clean Drum
.
4
Press
Start
( ) on screen.
The printer prints out a cleaning page. Toner particles on the drum surface are affixed
to the paper.
5
If the problem remains, repeat steps 3 through 4 until toner particles are not affixed to
the paper.
- 305 -
Replacement Parts
From time to time, you needs to replace the rollers and fuser unit to maintain top
performance and to avoid print quality problems and paper feed problems resulting from
worn parts.
The following items should be replaced after you have printed the specified number of
pages.
To purchase replacement parts, contact your Dell dealer or the retailer where you bought
your printer. We strongly recommend that these items be installed by a trained service
professional.
Item Yield (Average)
Tray 1 roller Approx. 90,000 pages
Tray 1 reverse roller Approx. 60,000 pages
Tray 2 roller Approx. 200,000 pages
Tray 2 reverse roller Approx. 100,000 pages
MP roller Approx. 100,000 pages
Transfer roller Approx. 10,000 pages
MP reverse roller Approx. 80,000 pages
Document feeder
(DADF) roller
Approx. 70,000 pages
Document feeder
(DADF) rubber pad
Approx. 20,000 pages
Fuser unit Approx. 90,000 pages
- 306 -
Ordering Supplies
You can order supplies using the Dell Toner Management System or the
Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool
.
If your printer is connected to a network, type your printer’s IP address in your Web browser
and click the toner supplies link.
1
Double-click the
Dell 2375dfw Mono MFP Toner Reorder
or
Dell 2375dnf Mono MFP
Toner Reorder
icon on your desktop.
OR
2
From the
Start
menu, select
Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP Dell 2375dfw Mono MFP Toner Reorder
or
Dell
2375dnf Mono MFP Toner Reorder
.
The Order Toner Cartridges window appears.
Go to
premier.dell.com
or www.premier.dell.com to order supplies online.
If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the
Order by Phone
heading.
OR
If your printer is connected to a network, type the printer’s IP address in your Web
browser to launch the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
, and click the supplies link.
NOTE: Refer to the following table to order toner cartridges.
Toner cartridge Part number
Dell Standard Capacity Toner Cartridge (3,000 pages) NWYPGa
a ISO standard page coverage in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752 testing methodology.
Dell High Capacity Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages) C7D6Fa
- 307 -
Troubleshooting
Clearing Jams in the DADF
Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray
Clearing LCD Error Messages
Solving Problems
- 308 -
Clearing Jams in the DADF
When a document jams while it passes through the DADF, a warning message appears on
the display.
NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the document glass for thick, thin or mixed
documents.
1
Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.
If the document is jammed in the paper feed area:
a
Open the DADF cover.
b
Remove the document by gently pulling it out.
- 309 -
c
Close the DADF cover. Then reload the document into the DADF.
If the document is jammed in the paper exit area:
a
Open the DADF cover.
b
Remove the document by gently pulling it out.
c
Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then load the documents
back into the DADF.
If the document is jammed in the duplex path:
- 310 -
a
Open the DADF cover.
b
Open the DADF inner cover.
c
Remove the document by gently pulling it out.
d
Close the DADF inner cover and the DADF cover. Then load the documents back
into the DADF.
- 311 -
2
If you cannot see the paper or cannot pull the jammed paper out, open the document
cover.
3
Remove the document from the feed area by carefully pulling it gently to the right.
4
Close the document cover. Then load the documents back into the DADF.
Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray
When a paper jam occurs,
Paper Jam
appears on the display. Refer to the table below to
locate and clear the paper jam.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly. Follow the steps
below to clear the jam.
Operator Panel Message Location of Jam Go to
Paper jam in Tray 1
Paper jam in optional
Tray 2
Paper jam in MPF
Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)
Paper Feed Jam (optional tray 2)
Paper Feed Jam (MPF)
"Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)"
"Paper Feed Jam (optional
tray 2)"
"MPF Jam"
Paper jam inside of
machine
Fuser Area Jam "Fuser Area Jam".
Paper jam in exit area between the fuser and exit area
Jam
"Paper Exit Jam".
Paper jam in duplex path in the duplex unit "Duplex Jam 1".
- 312 -
Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper automatically exits the printer.
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.
2
Pull the paper tray open.
3
Remove the paper by gently pulling it straight out.
If you cannot see the paper or the paper does not move when pulled, check the fuser
area. For more information, see "Fuser Area Jam".
- 313 -
4
Insert the paper tray into the printer until it snaps into place.
Printing automatically resumes.
Paper Feed Jam (optional tray 2)
1
Pull the optional tray 2 open.
2
Remove the jammed paper from the printer.
If you cannot see the paper in this area or the paper does not move when pulled, go to
the next step.
3
Pull the tray 1 half way out.
- 314 -
4
Pull the paper straight up and out.
5
Insert the trays back into the printer.
Printing automatically resumes.
MPF Jam
1
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the printer.
2
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.
- 315 -
Fuser Area Jam
NOTICE: The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the printer.
1
Open the front cover and lightly pull the toner cartridge straight out.
2
Remove the paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3
Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
- 316 -
Paper Exit Jam
1
Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper automatically exits the printer.
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.
2
Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.
3
If you cannot see the paper in the output tray or the paper does not move when
pulled, open the rear door.
- 317 -
4
If you see the jammed paper, push the two blue pressure levers down and remove the
paper. Skip to step 7.
If you do not see the paper, go to the next step.
5
While pushing the fuser lever to the down, open the fuser door.
NOTE: Ensure that to unfold the duplex guide before opening the fuser door
or you may damage the fuser door.
- 318 -
6
Pull the jammed paper out.
If the jammed paper does not move when you pull, push the two blue pressure levers
up to loosen the paper, and then remove it.
7
Return the fuser door, and duplex guide to their original position.
8
Close the rear door.
9
Open and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
- 319 -
Duplex Jam
Duplex Jam 0
1
Pull the duplex unit out of the printer.
2
Remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit.
If the paper does not come out with the duplex unit, remove the paper from the
bottom of the printer.
- 320 -
3
Push the duplex unit to the printer.
4
Open and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
CAUTION: If you do not push the duplex unit correctly, paper jam may occur.
Duplex Jam 1
1
Open the rear door.
2
Unfold the duplex guide fully.
3
Pull the jammed paper out.
4
Return the duplex guide and close the rear door.
5
Open and close the front cover.
Printing automatically resumes.
- 321 -
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams
By selecting the correct paper types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam
occurs, follow the steps outlined in "Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray".
• Follow the procedures in "Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray". Ensure that the
adjustable guides are correctly positioned.
• Do not overload the paper tray. Ensure that the paper is below the paper capacity
mark on the inside wall of the paper tray.
• Do not remove the paper from the tray while your printer is printing.
• Flex, fan and straighten the paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp or curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in the paper tray.
• Use only recommended print materials. See "Identifying Print Media Sources and
Specifications".
• Ensure that the recommended print side of print materials is facing down in the paper
tray and facing up in the MPF.
• Ensure that the duplex unit is installed correctly.
Clearing LCD Error Messages
NOTE: You may see an exclamation mark ( ) or a cross mark ( ) on the upper of
the display, in that case, press the cross mark to browse detailed message.
NOTE: [xxx] indicates the media type.
NOTE: [yyy] indicates the tray.
NOTE: [zzz] indicates the paper size.
NOTE: Some error messages are provided with graphical images on the LCD of the
operator panel.
NOTE: If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the printing job
again. If the problem persists, call for service.
NOTE: When you call for service, provide display message to service representative.
You can get help easily.
NOTE: Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options.
- 322 -
Display message Meaning Suggested solutions
Fax line not connected Your printer cannot
connect with a
remote printer or has
lost contact because
of a problem with the
phone line.
OR
No dial tone sounds
• Try again. If the problem persists,
please wait for an hour or try a
different phone line if possible and
then try to connect again.
• Turn the ECM mode on. See "
ECM
Mode
".
• Check that the phone line is
connected properly. See "Connecting
the Telephone Line".
• Check that the phone socket in the
wall is used by plugging in another
phone.
DADF paper jam at
entry
DADF paper jam at exit
DADF paper jam in
duplex path
DADF Rev. Jam
The loaded
document has
jammed in the DADF.
Clear the document jam. See "Clearing
Jams in the DADF".
Paper jam in duplex
path
Paper has jammed
during duplex
printing.
Clear the jam. See "Duplex Jam 1".
Device is not
supported
A non-USB device is
connected with USB
memory port.
Remove the non-USB device from USB
memory port.
Fuser Error
Low Heat Error
Over Heat Error
Fuser unit Error
There is a problem in
the fuser unit.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back
in. If the problem persists, please call for
service.
Invalid Cartridge The toner cartridge
you have installed is
not for your printer.
Install a Dell-genuine toner cartridge,
designed for your printer.
IP Conflict The IP address is used
by another user.
Check the IP address or obtain a new IP
address.
LSU Motor Error
LSU Fan Locked
LSU Hsync Error
A problem has
occurred in the LSU.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back.
If the problem persists, please call for
service.
- 323 -
Main Motor Locked There is a problem in
the main motor.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back.
If the problem persists, please call for
service.
Paper jam in MPF
Paper jam in Tray 1
Paper jam in optional
Tray 2
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of
the paper tray.
Clear the jam.
See "Paper Feed Jam (tray 1)", "Paper
Feed Jam (optional tray 2)" or "MPF
Jam".
Paper jam inside of
machine
Paper has jammed
inside of machine.
Clear the jam.
See "Fuser Area Jam".
Paper jam in exit area Paper has jammed in
the fuser and exit
area.
Clear the jam.
See "Paper Exit Jam".
Standard Bin Full The document
output tray is full.
The document output tray can hold up
to 150 sheets of plain paper. Once the
paper is removed from the document
output tray, the printer resumes printing.
Toner Cartridge is not
installed
The toner cartridge is
not installed.
Install the toner cartridge. See "Installing
the Toner Cartridge".
Toner Supply Error Toner did not supply
enough.
The front cover is not securely latched.
Close the cover until it locks into place.
Toner Cartridge Error Toner cartridge error. The front cover is not securely latched.
Close the cover until it locks into place.
Toner Almost Empty
Replace Toner Now
The toner cartridge is
empty.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new
one. See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge".
Toner Exhausted The lifespan of the
toner cartridge is
reached.
The toner cartridge is empty.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new
one for the best print quality. See
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
Toner Low The toner cartridge is
almost empty.
Take out the toner cartridge and
thoroughly shake it. By doing this, you
can temporarily increase printing quality.
OR
Replace the toner cartridge with a new
one for the best print quality. See
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
Display message Meaning Suggested solutions
- 324 -
Tray 2 Open The tray2 is not
securely latched.
Close the Tray 2.
Replace pickup roller The life of the tray
pickup roller will be
expired.
Replace the tray pickup roller with a new
one. Contact the service
representatives.
All Tray Empty There is no paper in
all tray.
Load paper in the tray. See "Loading
Print Media in the Paper Tray".
Scanner Locked The scanner is
locked.
Reboot the power. If the problem
persists, please call for service.
802.1x Network Error Fail to authenticate. Check the network authentication
protocol. If the problem persists,
contact your network administrator.
Scanner door open The document feeder
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it locks into place.
No Toner Cartridge Toner Cartridge is not
installed
Install the toner cartridge. See "Installing
the Toner Cartridge".
Tray 2 Connection
Error
There is a problem in
the tray 2.
Pull Tray 2 out and insert it.
Tray 2 Not Install The tray2 is not
installed.
Tray 2 is not installed. Install it.
See"Installing an Optional Tray 2"
Tray 2 is empty or
open
The Tray2 is empty or
open.
Load paper See "Loading Print Media in
the Paper Tray" or close Tray 2.
Tray 1 is empty or open The Tray1 is empty or
open.
Load paper See"Loading Print Media in
the Paper Tray" or close Tray 1.
Multi-Purpose Tray is
empty or open
The Mukti-Purpose
Tray is empty or
open.
Load paper See "Using the MPF (Multi
purpose feeder)"or close Multi-Purpose
Tray
Video Board HDD
Error
The video board HDD
is some error.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back
in. If the problem persists, please call for
service.
Video System Error The video system
occured some error.
Unplug the power cord and plug it back
in. If the problem persists, please call for
service.
Display message Meaning Suggested solutions
- 325 -
Solving Problems
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions.
Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists,
contact Dell.
Paper Feeding Problems
Door Open The front cover or
rear cover is not
securely latched.
Close the cover until it locks into place.
Fax Memory Low The memory is
almost full. No more
fax data can be
received.
Print or remove the received fax data in
the memory.
Fax Memory Empty Fax memory is full. Print or remove the received fax data in
the memory.
UI Communication
Error
The UI system is
failure.
Check UI connection.
Condition Suggested solutions
Paper is jammed during
printing.
Clear the paper jam. See "Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray".
Paper sticks together.
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the paper tray. The
paper tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper, depending on
the thickness of your paper.
• Ensure that you are using the correct type of paper. See
"Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications".
• Remove paper from the paper tray and flex or fan the paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper
do not feed.
• Different types of paper may be stacked in the paper tray. Load
paper of only one type, size and weight.
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam, clear the paper
jam. See "Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray".
Display message Meaning Suggested solutions
- 326 -
Paper does not feed
into the printer.
• Remove any obstructions from inside the printer. See
"Cleaning the Interior".
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the
tray and reload it correctly.
• There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess
paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the
specifications required by the printer. See "Identifying Print
Media Sources and Specifications".
The paper keeps
jamming.
• Ensure that the correct paper size is selected. See "Setting the
Paper Size".
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the printer. See
"Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications".
• There may be debris inside the printer. Open the front cover
and remove the debris.
Transparencies stick
together in the paper
exit.
Use only the transparencies specifically designed for a laser
printer. Remove each transparency as it exits from the printer.
Envelopes skew or fail
to feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the
envelopes.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 327 -
Printing Problems
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
The printer does
not print.
The printer is not
receiving power.
Check the power cord connections. Check the
power switch and the power source.
The printer is not
selected as the
default printer.
Select
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell
B2375dnf Mono MFP
as your default printer in
your Windows.
Click the Start button Settings Printers.
Right-click the
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
printer icon and
select Set as Default Printer.
Check the printer
for the following:
• The front or rear door is not closed.
• Paper is jammed.
• No paper is loaded.
• The toner cartridge is not installed.
If a printer system error occurs, contact your
service representative.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
printer is not
connected
properly.
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect it.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
printer is defective.
If possible, attach the cable to another
computer that is working properly and print a
job. You can also try using a different printer
cable.
The printer may be
configured
incorrectly.
Check the printer properties to ensure that all
of the print settings are correct.
The printer driver
may be incorrectly
installed.
Remove the printer driver and then reinstall it;
see "Uninstalling Software" and "Using Wireless
Setup Utility" respectively.
The printer is
malfunctioning.
Check the display message on the operator
panel to see if the printer is indicating a system
error.
→
- 328 -
The printer selects
print materials
from the wrong
paper source.
The paper source
selection in the
printer properties
may be incorrect.
For many software applications, the paper
source selection is found under the Paper tab
within the printer properties. Select the correct
paper source. See "Paper Tab".
A print job is
extremely slow.
The job may be
very complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try
adjusting the print quality settings.
The maximum print speed of your printer is up
to 35 PPM for Letter-sized paper.
Half the page is
blank.
The page
orientation setting
may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in your
application. See "Basic Tab".
The paper size and
the paper size
settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver
settings matches the paper in the tray.
The printer prints,
but the text is
wrong, garbled, or
incomplete.
The printer cable
is loose or
defective.
Disconnect the printer cable and reconnect. Try
a print job that you have already printed
successfully. If possible, attach the cable and
the printer to another computer and try a print
job that you know works. Finally, try a new
printer cable.
The wrong printer
driver was
selected.
Check the application’s printer selection menu
to ensure that your printer is selected.
The software
application is
malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another application.
The operating
system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Power
the printer off and then back on again.
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
- 329 -
Pages print, but are
blank.
The toner
cartridge is
defective or out of
toner.
Thoroughly shake the toner. See "Redistributing
Toner".
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
The file may have
blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain
blank pages.
Some parts, such
as the controller
or the board, may
be defective.
Contact a service representative.
The illustrations
print incorrectly in
Adobe Illustrator.
The setting in the
software
application is
wrong.
Print the document by selecting
Download as
Bit Image
in the Advanced window of the
Graphic properties.
The print quality of
photos is not
good. Images are
not clear.
The resolution of
the photo is very
low.
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the
photo size in the software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
The machine
prints, but the text
is wrong, garbled,
or incomplete.
If you are under
the DOS
environment, the
font setting for
your machine may
be set incorrectly.
Suggested solutions: Change the language
setting. See "Using the Dell Supplies Ordering
Utility".
Before printing, the
machine emits
vapor near the
output tray.
Using damp paper
can cause vapor
during printing.
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
- 330 -
Printing Quality Problems
The inside of the printer may be dirty or improper paper loading may reduce the print
quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition Suggested solutions
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page:
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily
extend the toner cartridge life. See "Redistributing Toner". If
this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner
cartridge.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example,
the paper is too moist or too rough. See "Identifying Print
Media Sources and Specifications".
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that
the toner cartridge needs cleaning. See "Cleaning the
Interior".
• The surface of the LSU part inside the printer may be dirty.
Clean the LSU (see "Cleaning the Interior").
Toner specks
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the
paper is too moist or too rough. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications".
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your
printer. See "Cleaning the Interior".
• The paper path may need cleaning. See "Cleaning the Drum".
Dropouts
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the
page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the
job.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has
moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. See
"Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications".
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing process can cause
some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of
paper.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. "Vertical repetitive
defects" on the next page.
• If these steps do not correct the problems, contact a service
representative.
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
- 331 -
White Spots
White spots appears on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to
the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller
may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a
service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service
representative.
Vertical lines
• If black vertical streaks appear on the page, the drum inside
the toner cartridge has probably been scratched. Install a
new toner cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
• If white vertical streaks appear on the page, the surface of the
LSU part inside the printer may be dirty. Clean the LSU (see
"Cleaning the Interior").
Gray background
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
• Change to lighter weight pages. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications".
• Check the printer’s environment; very dry (low humidity) or
high humidity (higher than 80% RH) conditions can increase
the amount of background shading.
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one. See
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
Toner smear
• Clean the inside of the printer. See "Cleaning the Interior".
• Check the paper type and quality. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications".
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See
"Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
Condition Suggested solutions
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
- 332 -
Vertical repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at
even intervals:
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a repetitive mark
occurs on the page, print a cleaning sheet several times to
clean the cartridge; see "Cleaning the Drum". After the
printout, if you still have the same problems, install a new
toner cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
• Parts of the printer may have toner on them. If the defects
occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct
itself after a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service
representative.
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner distributed on
the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different
batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until
necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the
printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have
overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams
can cause problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a
printed page, adjust the print resolution through your
software application or the printer properties.
Misformed characters
• If characters are improperly formed and produce hollow
images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try a different
paper. See "Identifying Print Media Sources and
Specifications".
• If characters are improperly formed and produce a wavy
effect, the scanner unit may need service. For service,
contact a service representative.
Condition Suggested solutions
A
- 333 -
Page skew
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications".
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly
and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the
paper stack.
Curl or wave
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperatures
and humidity can cause paper curl. See "Identifying Print
Media Sources and Specifications".
• Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the paper tray.
• Try printing to the rear door.
Wrinkles or creases
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications".
• Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the paper tray.
• Try printing to the rear door.
Back of printouts are
dirty
Check for leaks in the toner. Clean the inside of the printer.
See "Cleaning the Interior".
Condition Suggested solutions
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
- 334 -
Black pages
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove
the cartridge and reinsert.
• The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing.
Install a new toner cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge".
• The printer may require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Loose toner
• Clean the inside of the printer. See "Cleaning the Interior".
• Check the paper type and quality. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications".
• Install a new toner cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner
Cartridge".
• If the problem persists, the printer may require repair.
Contact a service representative.
Character Voids
Character voids have white areas where they should be solid
black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of
transparency. Because of the composition of the
transparency, some character voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Turn
over the stack of paper in the paper tray.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications. See
"Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications".
Horizontal stripes
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the
toner cartridge and reinsert.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Install a new toner
cartridge. See "Replacing the Toner Cartridge".
• If the problem persists, the printer may require repair.
Contact a service representative.
Curl If the printed paper is curled or the paper does not feed into
the printer:
• Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the paper tray.
• Try printing to other rear door.
Condition Suggested solutions
A
A
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
- 335 -
Fax Problems
Condition Suggested solutions
Receiving fax calls are
not being answered by
the printer
•
Receive Mode
set to
Tel
mode. (manual receive mode)
• The rings-to-answer setting might not be set correctly. (Under
Ans/Fax
mode, set the
Ring to Answer
to a digit greater than
the
Ring to Answer
setting for the TAD.)
• The DPRD feature might be turned on, but you do not have the
service, or you do have the service and the feature is not set
correctly.
• The fax line cord might not be correctly connected, or the fax
line cord is faulty.
• The printer might not be able to detect Receiving fax tones
because the answering machine is playing a voice message.
• A voice-messaging service might be interfering with the printer
as it attempts to answer calls.
• Fax Line might have signal integration issues. Please carry out
Fax Line Test
from Op-panel to confirm line status. See
"Testing Fax line connection".
• The printer is monitoring line condition while it is receiving or
sending a fax job. If an error occurs during the transmission
and the
ECM Mode
setting is
On
, the printer may request that
the portion of the fax job to be resent. You should turn off
ECM
Mode
only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax
job, and you are willing to accept the errors in the transmission
job. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying
to send a fax long distant or receive from long distant
(example: other countries etc.)
• The printer might be out of paper and the memory is full.
The printer cannot
receive faxes from an
extension telephone.
• The fax cable might not be securely connected.
• The printer dialing mode might be incorrectly set, or the
extension phone might be incorrectly set.
Faxes are not received
automatically.
•The
Fax
mode should be selected.
• Make sure that there is paper in the paper tray.
• Check to see if the display shows
Memory Full
.
The Receiving fax has
blank spaces or is
received in
poor-quality.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your printer by making a copy.
- 336 -
Receiving faxes are too
light.
The printer might be running out of toner while printing a fax.
Under Toner empty conditions, the printer will store the fax job
into memory, as soon as possible, replace the print cartridge,
and then reprint the fax.
Faxes are printed on two
pages instead of one.
The auto reduction setting may be turned Off, try enabling this
setting
Receiving Faxes are
not been printed by
the printer
Receive Forward feature might be turned Off, try enabling this
setting. You can set the printer to forward all incoming faxes to
specified Email addresses.
Please carry out
Fax Line Test
from
Op-panel to confirm line status. See "Testing Fax line
connection".
The printer is not
sending fax.
• If your printer is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be
generating a dial tone that the printer cannot detect.
• Fax Line might have signal integration issues. Please carry out
Fax Line Test
from Op-panel to confirm line status. See
"Testing Fax line connection".
No dial tone sound.
• Check that the phone line is connected properly. Please carry
out
Fax Line Test
from Op-panel to confirm line status. See
"Testing Fax line connection".
• Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging
in another phone.
• Fax Line might have signal integration issues. Please carry out
Fax Line Test
from Op-panel to confirm line status. See
"Testing Fax line connection".
The printer dials a
number, but the
connection with
another fax machine
fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or
cannot answer Receiving calls. Speak with the other machine
operator and ask her/him to sort out the problem.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 337 -
Faxes stop during
sending.
• The fax machine to which you are sending might be
malfunctioning.
• Your telephone line might not be working.
• A communication error might be interrupting the fax job.
• A poor telephone connection might exist.
• The fax machine to which you are sending might be
malfunctioning.
• The printer is monitoring line condition while it is receiving or
sending a fax job. If an error occurs during the transmission
and the
ECM Mode
setting is
On
, the printer may request that
the portion of the fax job to be resent. You should turn off
ECM
Mode
only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax
job, and you are willing to accept the errors in the transmission
job. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying
to send a fax long distant or receive from long distant
(example: other countries etc.)
• Your telephone line might not be working.
Outgoing fax calls
continue to be dialed.
The printer automatically redials a fax number if the redial
options are set to On.
Successfully Send
faxes job is not been
received at the other
fax machine.
• The receiving fax machine might be off or might have an error
condition, such as being out of paper.
• A fax might be in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy
number, other jobs that are ahead of it are waiting to be sent,
or the fax is set up for a delayed send.
Send faxes have a
shading at the trailing
edge of each media.
DADF (Flat-bed) scan size might be set to incorrect size.
The document stops in
the middle of faxing.
While faxing through DADF any documents smaller than 5.59
by 5.83 in. (142 by 148 mm) or larger than 8.5 by 14 in. (216 by
356 mm) might result into jam inside DADF. See "Clearing Jams
in the DADF".
Out of Memory. You might be sending a fax that is too large, or the resolution
might be too high.
Documents are not
stored in the memory.
There may not be enough memory to store the document. If
the display shows a Memory Full message, delete any
documents you no longer need from the memory and then
restore the document.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 338 -
Copying Problems
The document stops
feeding in the middle
of faxing.
The maximum length of a page that you can load is 381 mm (15
inches). Faxing of a longer page stops at 381 mm (15 inches).
Voice calls are not
received by the
extension telephone or
answering machine
that is connected to
the same line shared
by the printer.
• The fax line cord connection or configuration issue. See
"Making Connections".
• The receive mode or rings-to-answer settings might be
incorrectly set. See "Setting up the Fax System".
• The telephone answering machine or extension telephone
might not be functioning properly.
Condition Suggested solutions
Copies are too light or
too dark.
Use
Contrast
in
Copy
to darken or lighten the background of
the copies.
Smears, lines, marks or
spots appear on
copies.
• If defects are on the original, use
Contrast
in
Copy
to lighten
the background of your copies.
• If no defects are on the original, clean the document glass and
underside of the document cover. See "Cleaning the scanner".
Copy image is skewed.
• Ensure that the original is positioned correctly on document
glass.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
Blank copies print out. Ensure that the original is face down on the document glass or
face up in the DADF
Image rubs off the
copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the paper tray with paper from a new
package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the printer for the
extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper
jams occurs.
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the paper tray.
Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. If necessary,
check/adjust the paper guides.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight. 75 g/m
2
(20
lb) bond paper is recommended.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the
printer after a paper jam has been cleared.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 339 -
Scanning Problems
Fewer copies from the
toner cartridge than
expected prints out.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids or heavy lines. For
example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books or
other documents that use more toner.
• The document cover may be left open while copies are being
made.
Condition Suggested solutions
The scanner does not
work.
• Ensure that you place the document to be scanned face down
from the document glass, or face up in the DADF.
• There may not be enough available memory to hold the
document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if
that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the USB cable is connected properly.
• Ensure that the USB cable is not defective. Switch the cable
with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the
application you want to use to make certain that the scanner
job is being sent to the correct port.
The unit scans very
slowly.
• Check if the printer is printing received data. Scan the
document after the current job is completed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because
of the large amount of memory required to analyze and
reproduce the scanned image.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 340 -
Global address problems
Message appears on
your computer screen:
• “Device can't be set
to the H/W mode
you want.”
• “Port is being used
by another program.”
•“Port is Disabled.”
• “Scanner is busy
receiving or printing
data. When the
current job is
completed, try
again.”
• “Invalid handle.”
• “Scanning has failed.”
• There may be a copying or printing job in progress. When the
current job is complete, try the job again.
• The selected port is currently being used. Restart your
computer and try again.
• The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power
may be off.
• The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment
is not set up properly.
• Ensure that the port is properly connected and the power is
turned on. Then restart your computer.
• Check that the USB cable is properly connected.
Condition Suggested solutions
LDAP Maximum Query
Exceeded...
There exists limitation for number of results from the LDAP
server for each LDAP query.
The range for the number of results is 0~100.
Set the query between 1 and 100.
LDAP Server
Authentication
Failed...
If a device has invalid credential (ID or PW), LDAP server will
return authentication failure message.
LDAP Query Failed... If a user presses the STOP key during the search and no data
was returned before cancelling, the device will display this
message.
LDAP No Such
Attribute...
Result is depending on the query from the device.
If a user sees this error message, changing the query can avoid
this situation.
LDAP Address Not
Found...
This case is happening only when connection was successful
and search result was nothing.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 341 -
Common Windows Problems
NOTE: Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer
for further information on Windows error messages.
LDAP Server Not
Found...
It could be a wrong IP address setup or Server is not working
correctly.
Administrator can suspect the physical condition, device (client)
configuration and server status.
In case of device configuration, administrator should check IP
address or hostname or port number.
LDAP Time Limit
Exceeded...
It only happens when server is returning error code=8 which
means "Server Time-out".
When server couldn't return all search result within the timeout.
This is abnormal case which is depending on the server side
condition though.
A user can test server operation with other queries.
Condition Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message
appears during
installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the
StartUp Group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer
driver.
“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception OE”,
“Spool32”, or “Illegal
Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing
again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error
occurred.” messages
appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting
until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in
standby mode or after printing has been completed, check the
connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Machine information is
not displayed when
you click the device in
the Devices and
Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel Devices and Printers Right-click on your
printer icon and select Printer properties) If the port is set to
File or LPT, uncheck them and select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
The error related toast
message pops up.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 342 -
Common Linux Problems
Condition Suggested solutions
The printer doesn’t
print.
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open MFP
configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers
configuration window to look at the list of available printers.
Ensure that your printer is displayed on the list. If not, please,
invoke Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
• Check if the printer is started. Open Printers configuration and
select your printer on the printers list. Look at the description
in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains “(stopped)”
string, please, press the
Start
button. After that normal
operation of the printer should be restored. The “stopped”
status might be activated when some problems in printing
occurred. For instance, this could be an attempt to print
document when MFP port is claimed by a scanning
application.
• Check if the MFP port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O
interface (MFP port), the situation of simultaneous access of
different “consumer” application to the same MFP port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time
is allowed to gain control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. You should
open MFP ports configuration and select the port assigned to
your printer. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you
should wait for completion of the current job or should press
Release port button, if you are sure that the present owner is
not functioning properly.
• Check if your application has special print option such as
“-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter
then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in
the command item.
- 343 -
The printer does not
appear on the
scanners list.
• Check if your printer is attached to your computer. Ensure that
it is connected properly via the USB port and is turned on.
• Check if the scanner driver for your printer is installed in your
system. Open MFP Configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Ensure that driver with a
name corresponding to your
printer
's name is listed in the
window.
• Check if the MFP port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O
interface (MFP port), the situation of simultaneous access of
different “consumer” application to the same MFP port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time
is allowed to gain control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. This can
usually happen while starting scan procedure, and appropriate
message box appears.
• To identify the source of the problem, you should open MFP
ports configuration and select the port assigned to your
scanner. MFP port's symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0
designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /dev/mfp4, so
scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so
forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the
port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case,
you should wait for completion of the current job or should
press Release port button, if you are sure that the present
port's owner is not functioning properly.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 344 -
The printer doesn’t
scan.
• Check if a document is loaded into the printer.
• Check if your machine is connected to the computer. Ensure
that if it is connected properly if I/O error is reported while
scanning.
• Check if MFP port is not busy. Since functional components of
MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (MFP
port), the situation of simultaneous access of different
"consumer" application to the same MFP port is possible. To
avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed
to gain control over the device. The other "consumer" will
encounter "device busy" response. This can usually happen
while starting scan procedure, and appropriate message box
will be displayed.
To identify the source of the problem, you should open MFP
ports configuration and select the port assigned to your
scanner. MFP port's symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0
designation displayed in the scanners' options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /dev/mfp4, so
scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so
forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if the
port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case,
you should wait for completion of the current job or should
press Release port button, if you are sure that the present
port's owner is not functioning properly.
I can’t print when I
installed both Linux
Print Package (LPP)
and MFP driver on the
same machine
simultaneously.
• Since both Linux Printer Package and MFP driver make a
symbolic link to "lpr" printing command, which is commonly
used on Unix clones, it is not recommended to use both
package on the same machine.
Can’t scan via Gimp
Front-end.
• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane:Device dialog.” on the
“Acquire” menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for
Gimp on the your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home
page. For the detail information, refer to the Help for Linux
distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application.
If you wish to use other kind of scan application, refer to the
Help for application.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 345 -
Common Mac Problems
Problems in the choose
r
NOTE: Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for further
information on Mac OS error messages.
I encounter error
“Unable to open MFP
port device file!” when
printing a document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via SLPR utility, for
example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of
CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are
changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning.
Since Linux MFP driver locks MFP port while printing, the abrupt
termination of the driver keeps the port locked and therefore
unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurred,
try to release the MFP port.
Condition Suggested solutions
The printer does not
print a document from
Acrobat Reader.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products:
Printing the PDF file as an image may solve this problem. Turn
on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
The document has
printed, but the print
job has not
disappeared from the
spooler in Mac OS
10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or higher.
Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the cover page
printing.
This problem is caused because Mac OS cannot create the font
during the cover page printing. English alphabet and numbers
are displayed normally at the cover page.
When printing a
document in Mac with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or
higher, colors print
incorrectly.
The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched
with the one in Acrobat Reader.
Condition Suggested solutions
- 346 -
Troubleshooting PostScript (PS) Errors
NOTE: To receive a printed or screen displayed message when PS errors occur,
open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the
PostScript errors section.
Problem Possible Cause Solution
PostScript file
cannot be printed.
The PostScript option
may not be installed.
Print a configuration page and verify that
the PS version is available for printing.
Limit Check Error The print job may be
too complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try
adjusting the print quality settings.
Or, expand the memory capacity.
A PS error page
prints.
Print job may not be PS. Ensure that the print job is a PS job.
Check to see whether the software
application expected a setup or PS header
file to be sent to the printer.
The optional tray 2
is not selected in
the driver.
The printer driver has
not been configured to
recognize the optional
tray 2.
Open the PostScript driver properties,
select the
Device Options
tab, and set the
Tray Options
option to
Tray 2
.
- 347 -
Installing
Accessories
Installing Printer Accessories
Installing an Optional Tray 2
- 348 -
Installing Printer Accessories
Never remove the control board while the printer is plugged in.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power cord when
installing or removing ANY internal or external printer option.
The control board is sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing an internal
cord, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before finishing
installation, discharge any static electricity once again.
Installing an Optional Tray 2
You can increase the paper handling capacity of your printer by installing an optional tray 2.
This tray holds 250 sheets of paper.
1
Power the printer off and unplug all cables from the printer.
2
Remove the packing tape.
- 349 -
3
Grasp the control board cover and open it.
4
Connect the cable as below.
- 350 -
5
Close the control board cover.
6
Combine machine and optional tray 2 as below.
- 351 -
7
Connect a necessary cable and power on the machine.
8
Load paper in the optional tray 2. For information about loading paper in this tray, see
"Loading Paper".
9
Reconnect the power cord and cables and then power the printer on.
After installing the optional tray 2, printer drivers will automatically sense tray 2.
- 352 -
Specifications
General Specifications
Dell technical support policy
Contacting Dell
Warranty and return policy
- 353 -
General Specifications
NOTE: The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice.
See www.dell.com or www.dell.com/support for possible changes in information.
Item Description
Dimensiona
a Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset and other accessories.
Width x Length x Height 447 x 462 x 420 mm (18.8 x 18.2 x 16.5
inches)
WeightaMachine with
consumables
15.3 Kg (33.0 Ibs)
Noise Levelb
b Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex
printing.
Ready mode
Less than 26 dB (A)
Print mode Less than 54 dB (A)
Copy mode Less than 56 dB (A)
Scan mode (scanner
glass)
Less than 56 dB (A)
Scan mode (document
feeder)
Less than 58 dB (A)
Temperature Operation 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
Storage (packed) -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)
Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH
Storage (packed) 10 to 90% RH
Power ratingc110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V
Power
requirements
110-127 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
6.5A
220-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
3.5A
Power
consumption
Average operating mode Less than 700W
Ready mode Less than 15W
Power save mode Less than 4W
Power off mode Less than 0.1W
- 354 -
Dell technical support policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the
customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the Operating
System, application software, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as
shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and
all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online
technical support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support options may be
available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and
peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original
manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals
(DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
c See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for
your machine.
China only
ѝഭ㜭᭸ḷ䇶
රਧ 㜭᭸ㅹ㓗 ިර㜭㙇˄N:gK˅
'HOO%GQI  
׍ᦞഭᇦḷ߶*%
- 355 -
Contacting Dell
You can access Dell Support at www.dell.com/support. Select your region on the
WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools
and information.
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:
World Wide Web
–
www.dell.com/
–
www.dell.com/ap/
(Asian/Pacific countries only)
–
www.dell.com/jp/
(Japan only)
–
www.euro.dell.com
(Europe only)
–
www.dell.com/la/
(Latin American and Caribbean countries)
–
www.dell.ca
(Canada only)
Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
–
ftp.dell.com
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your email address as your password.
Electronic Support Service
–
mobile_support@us.dell.com
–
support@us.dell.com
–
la-techsupport@dell.com
(Latin America and Caribbean countries only)
–
apsupport@dell.com
(Asian/Pacific countries only)
–
support.jp.dell.com
(Japan only)
–
support.euro.dell.com
(Europe only)
Electronic Quote Service
–
apmarketing@dell.com
(Asian/Pacific countries only)
–
sales_canada@dell.com
(Canada only)
Warranty and return policy
Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are
new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information
about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the Important Information.
- 356 -
Index
A
Address Book, use,53
automatic redialing,254
B
booklet printing, 172
C
cartridge
installing,34
ordering,306
redistributing, 301
replacing,303
cleaning
drum,304
exterior, 298
interior,298
scanner,300
collation, special
copy, 190, 197
component location,21
copying
canceling,187-196
contrast, 190
default setting,197
number of pages, 187
problem, 338
quality,189
reduced/enlarged
copy,196
time out, setting,70
D
DADF (duplex automatic
document feeder),
loading,184
date and time, setting, 69,
77, 261
dayliging saving,
setting, 68, 70, 261
delayed fax,260
display language,
changing,68
document
jam, clearing,308
loading
document
glass,18
5
in DADF, 184
preparing, 183
document glass
cleaning, 300
driver, printer
installing,81
uninstalling,91
drum, cleaning,304
E
email
scanning/sending, 202
setting account,56-57
error messages,321
ethernet, connecting,45
extension phone,
connecting,41
F
fax system, setting
advanced,263
basic,247
faxing
automatically, 250-251
manually,251
problem, 335
fit to page
printing, 170
G
graphic properties,
printing, 159
group dial, faxing
dialing,260
editing,259
setting,259
H
help,167
I
ID, setting,247
installing
memory,348
toner cartridge,34
J
jam, clearing
document,308
paper,311
- 357 -
L
layout properties,
printing, 155
Linux
installing driver,278
printer properties, 285
printing, 285
uninstalling driver,279
loading, document
in scanner glass, 187
loading, paper
in MPF (multi purpose
feeder),145
in paper tray,37
M
Mac
installing driver,268
printing, 270
scanning,272
uninstalling driver,269
O
operator panel,23
option, installing
memory,348
ordering supplies, 306
orientation, printing in
Windows, 155
output location,
selecting, 142
overlay, using,177
P
paper jam, clearing,311
paper loading
in MPF (multi purpose
feeder), 145
in paper tray,37
paper size, setting
paper tray,148
print,158
paper source, setting,158
paper type, setting
paper tray,148
print,158
power save mode,69
printer driver
installing,81
uninstalling,91
printer NVRAM
clearing,296
printer properties,
setting,154
printing
booklets,172
canceling,153
fitting to a selected paper
size,170
from Linux,285
from Windows,153
multiple pages on one
sheet,167
posters,170
problem,327
using overlays,177
watermarks,175
priority fax,261
problem, solve
Windows,341
problem, solving
copying,338
error messages,321
faxing,335
paper feeding,325
printing,327
printing quality,330
PS errors,346
scanning,339
R
rear output,143
reduced/enlarged
copying, 196
replacing toner
cartridge, 303
reports, printing,263
resolution, printing,161
S
scanner, cleaning,300
scanning
from operator
panel,200
from WIA, 205, 208
problem, 339
setup
to email,57
software
installing,81
uninstalling,91
speed dial, fax
dialing,257
storing,257
supplies, ordering,306
T
tel line, connecting,41
toll save mode,261
toner cartridge
ordering, 306
redistributing, 301
replacing,303
U
USB cable, connecting,44
- 358 -
USB memory
managing,51
W
watermarks, printing, 175

Navigation menu